Home

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

1. lm Project Edit Find Replace View Onine Diagno 18 xl altal irl cil am pue eed ed T sel e sd po la zs ens sd ers 8 Delal e 5 sspe sls ela lel ses ada iss 5 2 8 d za ERES Pres EJ frs al foe ole e inl amp zlil pl No ofboards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 3 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings J Type Master station X ER pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x X 8 Device memon Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode x 18 Device init All connect count 5j 1000 Y1000 WO w1000 5 0 5 0 ut 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop X x Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 10 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial setting Initial settings Interrupt setting Interrupt settings Indispensable settings setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded setting Project i Ready 00219 Host station NUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X
2. sMELSOFT series veloper Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1 Project Edit d Replat iew Online Diagnostic oos Window Help 18 x cl 35 pr pede e ep oes Blu a Heel le amp ele alel sols Program p x BI E B Unset project No ofboardsinmodule Boards Blank no setting 8 58 Program Device comment 1 2 3 540 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 8 PLC paramete peralional setting Operational settings 3 Network para Type Master station z 5 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto stat v amp Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode 18 Device init connect count 5 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote registei Wi Remote registerfE Ww 2 Remote inputfRx Ver Remote Ver 2 Remote registerfEWi 2 Remote register IW Special el SB Special registei SW Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop z x z Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting 4 La Indispensable setngs No setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded Noseling Aleadyset E Ready 02H Host station NUM 2 Setthe network parameters using the
3. Ready 10 43 Indispensable settings Remote outputRrY Remote register R wir Remote register Fi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial ___Interrupt setting a I ire Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 9 8 Program 8 1 Device comment 1 1 221 18 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 si PLC paramete Operational setin Operational settings iw Network Type Master station 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start BI Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode v I Device init All connect count 2 Remote input Fis Stop Asynchronous ag 2 information Initial settinc No setting Already Set if it is needed No setting Already set 002 Host station Ove NUM SCRL 10 43 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 44 MELSEC Q 2 Setti
4. 11 18 11 2 3 Setting the local station parameters ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeene nennen 11 19 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 11 19 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station Station number 1 3 seit aec eire etae E oii Peer E 11 21 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 11 22 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station stanon namber 5 AG ae ne ne AG ANA Aad 11 24 12 4 Creating a program noter Fc eter pred e te ae erui teed i vero Fe vtr aes ever 11 25 1 Master station program trennen etre EEEE nnne ens 11 27 2 Local station program sescenti t ve tL t e tL a DEL BR E a D e a D du 11 27 11 2 5 Pertorming the data INK ici dace ente tee desc dene do ed 11 28 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 11 28 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program sse 11 29 11 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used seen 11 30 Gontiguring a SySter uo oi n e tee ra terrere ee Pe n 11 30 1 Setting the master and local stations
5. 1 6 T Branch connection 7 11 Temporary error invalid acceptance status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling request 8 26 Temporary error invalid complete status 8 27 Temporary error invalid request 8 26 Temporary error invalid station setting ree ee toi ec ves ter bots 1 10 4 61 Temporary error invalid station setting information 8 29 Temporary error invalid station specification cesses 8 31 Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result 8 32 Index 4 Temporary error invalid station specification 8 32 Temporary error invalid status 8 35 Terminal 7 6 Terminal resistor A 16 The remote device station is not operating normally exert eee ese 13 7 The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does V IW NOU startup tette 13 7 Tightening torque range 7 8 Total number of stations 8 34 Transient tr
6. 6 46 6 7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction ssssseeeeeneee 6 48 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link nennen 7 1 T2 Iristallatlor tr Eh er ete ne reete re eed ee ee Pe eere e 7 8 7 2 1 Handling precautions sssssssssseesseesseeseene nennen nennen rennen rennen rentrer nnns 7 8 7 2 2 Installation environment adhana aandaa Aaaa dba 7 8 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and SettinS cccccccecceseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeaesaeceeseaesaesaeseeseaeseeeeaeeaees 7 4 7 4 Checking the Module Status Hardware Test ccceccesseeceeceeeeseeseceeeeeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseseaeeaesaeseeseeneaees 7 7 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cables sese 7 9 Wiring ez das 7 10 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable sse 7 11 7 6 1 T Branch system configuration nennen nennen nennen nnne nennen 7 11 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list seen 7 12 A 8 A 8 Y T Switch Settings een ence atte tete e qe E ne tee 7 13 FAA Station number setting ii 7 13 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings ssssssssseeeneeneneenee nennen 7 14 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test
7. A 14 Master A 14 1 1 Master station automatic refresh parameter hme 6 10 6 22 6 34 Master station information 8 29 Master station network parameter Settings e eret 6 5 6 17 6 29 Master station return specification information 8 29 Master switching request acknowledgment esses 8 28 Master switching request complete 8 28 Master station transient transmission sStatUS ei M 8 30 Master module A 14 Max communication station number 8 34 Max link scan time 8 34 Maximum number of link points 3 1 Maximum overall cable distance 3 1 3 3 3 5 Maximum transmission distance 3 1 Min link scan time 8 34 Mode selection method 8 40 Mode setting 8 33 Module operating status 8 33 Module 8 27 8 31 Monitoring time setting 8 31 Multiple temporary error invalid station specification essen 8 31 Index 2
8. 11 5 11 1 3 Setting the local station parameters 11 6 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station sees 11 6 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local 11 8 11 1 4 Creating a program 11 9 1 Master station progran arara EAR nne AAA trennen etr 11 11 2 Eocalistation occi oett e e PE LO ER bedi wien 11 11 A 10 10 11 1 5 Performing the data link sss 11 12 1 Confirming the operation with the LED 11 12 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 11 13 11 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used ssssseseeeeeenen eene 11 14 14 2 1 Configuring a Syste Masi oca tet rot eta de ote i teo atto ated teo utet 11 14 1 Setting the master and local stations esssssssssssssseeeeeeenetnenne nennen 11 15 11 2 2 Setting the master station parameters sse 11 16 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 11 16 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station
9. 10 44 10 3 3 Initial setting of the remote device 1 10 45 1 Setting the target station number sessssssssssssseeeeenee tete trennen nnns 10 45 2 Setting the regist procedure registration cccceccecceceeseceeceeeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeeeeeeateaes 10 45 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings 10 49 10 3 4 Greating program uius diurni ipd euge 10 52 10 3 5 Performing the data link ia a nnns 10 56 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 10 56 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 10 57 11 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is 11 1 T1171 Gontiguring ot e ae et lere a leti ma te dene elo 11 1 1 Setting the master and local stations sesssssssssssssseseeeeeennet nennen 11 2 11 1 2 Setting the master station parameters sssssssssssssssssseseeeee nennen 11 3 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station sessssssssssseeeeeenes 11 3 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station
10. itc t E olojojoljo c pe pee ere eo ere re pe r e elelileiele z i zizisimizsirsizizi i zi z zi 2 2 2 12 2 515 lt olololo o l ojlolol oj oils 1 A ee gt ke RE 21212 2122 21212 W10E W10F 11 10 11 10 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 1 Master station program Local station status confirmation XO XOF 580 0 o Hr wc NO M100 5180 0 11 150 NO Mi00 Control program X000 22 X20 2 Local station program Confirmation of data link status X0 XOF o NC NO N100 NO M100 Control program X1000 i X21 11 11 wy MELSEC Q Station number 1 is performing the data link Station number 1 is faulty Control program using data received from a local station Program to generate transmission data to a local station Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from the master station Program to generate send data to the master station 11 11 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 1 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station fir
11. 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitismeeded setting Ready Q02H Host station Ove SCRL 11 24 11 24 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 4 Creating a program Master station Master station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 Ver 2 compatible buffer memory RXOOF RX01 This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Ver 1compatible local station Ver 2compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations station number 5 occupies 2 stations double ee ee ee Local station ESSI ee PLC CPU to Y100F to Y1000 RYO1F to RYO10 Y101F to Y1010 RYO2F to RYO20 Y102F to Y1020 RYOS3F to RYOSO Y103F to Y1030 RYOAF to RY040 Y104F to Y1040 RYOS5F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050 RYO6F to RYO60 Y106F to Y1060 RYO7F to RYO70 Y107D to Y1070 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 Ver 2 compatible Local station buffer memory PLC CPU
12. hele a hapa bei FO CPU EEA Remote I O station station number 1 AJ65BTB1 16D Station X100F to X1000 XOF to X00 number 1 X101F to X1010 Sto J X102F to X1020 nyme a X103F to X1030 Station X104F to X1048 08 Remote I O station station number 2 ib X105F to X1050 AJ65BTB1 16T YOF to YOO Sato i i Y1 OOF to Y1 000 number 1 Y101F 1010 Remote O station station number 3 Station Y102F to Y1020 2 number 2 Y103F to Y1030 Station Y104FtoY1048 Y1047toY1040 H YOF to 08 X07 to X00 LL Y105F to Y1050 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q xo XOF xi Read data link status 9 E 9 9 jw 580 of each station 7 Station number 1 is faulty Processing upon m occurrence of faulty 4 9 te i Station number 2 is faulty station 2 11 52 Station number 3 is faulty S Station number 1 is 13 CALL F9 performing the data link Confirmation of data link MI Station number 2 is status 3 18 m F20 performing the data link 2 Station number 3 is C Pao performing the data link P 22 FEND P10 X1000 140 Control program for 26 RET station number 1 2 20 X20 3 27 Y1020 f Control program lt ontro program for 30 RET Station number 2 2 P30 x2 31 31048 X1040 4 4 y Control program for statio
13. 8 29 Parameter setting checklist App 42 Parameter setting items 6 3 Parameter setting status 8 29 Parameter setting test result 8 32 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction 1 6 4 23 Parameter settings 6 1 Part identification nomenclature and settings 7 4 Performance specification 3 1 Precautions on programming 8 1 Procedure before starting the data link 7 1 Processing time for dedicated instructions 5 35 ce rtr rein 8 1 Index 3 R Random access 8 20 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching 8 27 Refresh instruction at standby master SWILChIFIg 2 idco cierre ie recte 8 26 Refresh instruction at standby master switching result esses 8 31 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching 8 27 Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction 8 26 Remote device station A 14 1 1 Remote device station communication
14. 4034 4404n RWr 4 4C044 44054 RWw5 RWr5 4 05 _ RHMw E I eg Rwr6 4 06 4074 Rwr7 4 07 4408 RWr 8 4 08 409 RWw9 fe Rwr9 4C09 440h4 _ RWWwA j ro a EE i ACOAH Station J 4 RWwB RWB 4 0 Station number 2 440 RWr C 4C0C number 2 440D4 RWW Di b s RW D 4COD 440En RWE d RW E 44F4 E RW F ACOFu 44104 RWr 10 4 10 4414 RWI do E RWrii 4C114 44240 RWw12 000 ooo d 12 4 12 Rwa RWr13 4C13 to to to 4BFC RWr 7FC 5 4 RWw7FD oi i o RWr7FD 53FDu 4BFEn RWw7FE E RWr7FE 5 ABFA RWr7FF 53FFu 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station e Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in
15. MELSEC Q c When the master station has returned to system operation and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master station output Standby master station controlling Remote Station number 0 Remote input RX RY20 to RY2F RY30 to RYSF output RY Remote I O station 0 to RYOF Station number 2 peel Number of occupied stations 1 RY10 to RY1F psobeedte deceis Snan 3 Remote I O station l c X00 to XOF Yoo to YoF Station number 3 Fue uec Number of occupied stations 1 Nigio AE th doctos tico ROC 4 RY40 to RY4F Y10 to Y1F pc 00 to Y00 to YOF Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the standby master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station using the sequence program 2 Standby master station input Standby master station controlling Remote input RX Station number 0 Remote X00 to RXOF Station number 2 rs Number of occupied stations 1 y pen e
16. Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program Device comment i Parameter Start 1 0 No si PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Local station E Remote pass Master station data link type EL Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wr Remote registerF ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register R wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set s Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 7 11 7 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for rem
17. RWrFE Pp RWWFF RW FF Address 2E0u 2 1 For station 2E24 number 1 2 2 4 2 5 For station 2E6 number 2 2 7 2 8 2 9 For station 2EA number 3 2EBu 2 2 For station 2EE number 4 2EFu 2 0 2 1 For station 2F2 number 5 2 A to 3DCu 3DD For station 3DEu M number 64 3DFu 2 8 14 8 PROGRAMMING Master station Address 2 0 For station 2 1 number 1 2E24 t 2 2 4 For station 2 5 number 2 2E64 t 2 7 2 8 For station 2 9 number 3 2 2 gt 2 For station 2 0 number 4 2 t 2EFu 2 0 For station 2 1 number 5 2 2 2 M to 3DCu For station 3DD number 64 3DEn 3DFu MELSEC Q b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Remote
18. SETI Station number setting switch Transmission speed setting Switch Station number 1 156kbps J Mode select switch 0 Nomal mode 2 MITSUBISHI CCo 10 40 10 40 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN WELSEGAJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CON A JL conj K B SEL C H POWER S T a 2 UP LRUN 3 DOWN 1 Station number setting switch SWi o Transmission speed setting switch o TEST 4 D gao OFF D 10 S 20 OFF z1 0 40 2 FF Station 0 gia 85 0 number 4 TA 0 St 141 ON 6 fifo 2 2 OFF iU 1 OFF 4 7 B tu 4 OFF 5 2 OFF gt 156kbps p Im jo ao 1 OFF 8 id J MODE Mode select switch 3 Ver 2 Mode Nomal mode CON C IP Ww MITSUBISHI CC1ink PA 7 10 41 10 41 10 COMMUNICATION BETWE
19. SB2 Instruct to stop data link SB45 219 9 RST 82 Tum the data link stop instruction off RST SB3 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45 3 222M SET M303 Instruct to change parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M303 il 2241 Mov KO D100 Clear complete status 4 Slave station setting data send Ka receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid Mov K3 D102 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Moy K3 D103 Number of retries 3 times mov Ki D104 1 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Mov KO D105 7 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop Mov KO D106 Scan mode specification Asynchronous mov KO D107 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 d 261 4 moy H2101 110 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 MOV H102 111 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOV H103 112 Third Remote station occupies 1 station station number 3 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14H for station No 20 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M303 2781 mov mov MOV Parameter registration data link startup M303 D100 D110 D150 D160 um H eP RLPASET 00 Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M30
20. X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 RX02 RX03 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 RX04 RX05 X106F to X1060 RX06 X107D to X1070 X108F to X1080 RX07 RX08 X109F to X1090 X10AF to X10A0 RX09 RXOAF X10BF to X10B0 X10CF to X10C0 RXOBF RXOCF o Y1000 o Y1010 RXODF RYOOF RYO1F o Y1020 o Y1030 RYO2F RYOSF o Y1040 o Y1050 o Y1060 RYOA4F RYO5F RYO6F to Y1070 o Y1080 RYO7F RYOSF o Y1090 o Y10A0 RYO9F RYOAF o Y10BO RYOBF o Y10C0 vro 11 25 RYOCF RYODF RX000 1 7 x1070 oY1000 o RX010 RYO1F to RYO10 oY1010 oRXo0 d ff RYO F to RYO20 o 1020 o RX030 RYOSF to RY030 1030 o RX040 RYO4F to RYO40 o 1040 o RX050 o 1050 o RX060 o Y1060 o RX070 to Y1070 o RX080 oY1080 o RX090 oY1090 o RXOAO RYOAF to RYOAO o Y10A0 o RXOBO RYOBF to RYOBO oY10B0 o RYOCF to RYOCO Y10C0 o RXODO RYODF to RYODO 10DD to Y10DO o RY000 X100F to 1000 o RYO10 X101F to X1010 o RY020 X102F to X1020 o RYO30 X103F to X1030 o RYO40 X104F to X1040 o RYO50 X105F to 1050 o RYO60 X106F to X1060 o RY070 Il X107D to X1070 o RY080 X108F to X1080
21. 3 ee RIWT Set data range Data eam Start I O number of the module OtFEH o to FEH Binaryi6bits 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Device name Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of M Within the range of the writing Bit specified device D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by pus the status when the instruction is complete 81 0 Completion status No error normal completion System A than 0 Error code 51 Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent 0 to 64 User station b8 b7 Access code F See 1 and 2 User Attribute code Access code Attribute code Buffer memory 3 address or device number 1 to 480 S1 pomt Specify the write data count in word units 3 User to write PTUS Specify the buffer memory start address or device start User number App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data will be written When the ra
22. fHeaeoma 6 Specalinkregste sw Special relay sm o j Dema Specialregister S so ss Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 9 App 9 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIWT instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU 2 Command G RIWT 1 gt Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Device memory 4 1 Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of the master module 2 Writes the data specified by S2 to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 83 of the station specified by S1 1 or to the PLC CPU device 3 The specified station returns the write complete response to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns ON b The RIWT instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously However for the same local station or intelligent device station this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIWT instruction the completion device D and the status display device at comple
23. 1 10 4 62 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error 1 7 4 27 Dedicated instruction 4 75 Dedicated instruction list App 2 Delay timer information 8 33 Detailed LED display status 8 32 Details of the I O signals 8 4 Differences between the new and previous App 40 EMC directive ssssssssssesseee A 13 Error invalid station setting function 1 10 4 56 Error invalid station specified status 8 29 8 34 Event issuance for the interrupt prOQralTI 22 iiti 1 9 4 48 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote I O net mode 6 43 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net additional Imode 6 29 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 mode 6 5 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 mode 6 17 Example of parameter setting with dedicated 6 48 Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 28 External dimensions diagram App 1 Index 1 F Faulty stations are genera
24. c ccecceccecceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseetaesaeseeeeaeeaees 7 15 8 1 Precautions on Programming a nrn trennen tnnt nnne nnns 8 1 8 2 0 Signals forthe PEG CPU vas ro EL e qe ER ats 8 2 8 2 1 4 O signal liSE oa n gr treten tta P cer tr te ei t bete re OI eee ee 8 2 8 2 2 Details of the l O signals 8 4 823 Butter n ater rego a ee pL d t ep Od 8 5 8 3 1 Buffer memory list eeraa era eeen E 8 5 8 3 2 Buffer memory details senri nikoi raaa aiaa a nennen nennen nnne nennen nnne nennen 8 8 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW sse enne tnnt 8 26 8 4 1 Link special relays enne nnne inneren 8 26 8 4 2 Link special registers SW esee a a a aa sins a aei aats 8 31 8 5 Mode Selection Method s aed det et nde endete edes 8 40 9 1 When Remote I O Net Mode is Used ssssssssssssesesssseee nennen enne there trennt 9 1 93 1 Gonftigutirig a Systelm side atm endis nib n SS 9 1 1 Setting the master station een eerte trate Hn Cre ee P en i Hr MT RH E ede D lieth 9 2 2 Setting the remote I O stations eese eene tne nnne nnne 9 3 9 1 2 Setting the master station parameters
25. ccccceeececceeeeeeeceeceeeeaeseeceeseeeeaesaeseeseeeeaesaeseeseaeteseneeeaees 9 4 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 9 4 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master Station 9 6 9 1 3 Creating a program oe eececcecccceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeaeeaecaeseaesaecaecaeseaesaesaeseeesaesaeceeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeeeeteaeeats 9 7 9 1 4 Performirig the data link 4 e i eg IRL ERREUR p RR RI de 9 9 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sss 9 9 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program sssssseeeeenennn nens 9 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 1to 10 57 10 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used sssseseeneeneeren eene ennt tnn 10 1 10 31 Configuring a System a oot eto eta ania eco tb ed ate te 10 1 1 Setting the master station 10 2 2 Setting the remote device station essent nennen rennes 10 3 10 1 2 Setting the master station parameters sssssssssssssseeeeeeeeneennet eren 10 4 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station ssssssssssseeeenns 10 4 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 6 10 1 3 Initial settin
26. 1 3 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 1 9 4 45 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction 8 27 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result 8 33 Remote I O net mode A 14 Remote I O A 14 1 1 Remote I O station communication 1 2 Remote I O station points setting 1 12 4 65 Remote input RX 8 10 Remote A 14 Remote net mode A 14 4 53 Remote net additional mode A 14 2 1 4 69 Remote net ver 1 mode A 14 2 2 Remote net ver 2 mode A 14 2 2 4 68 Remote output 8 10 Remote register RWr 8 14 Remote register 8 14 Remote Station A 14 Reserved station function 4 55 Reserved station specified status 8 29 8 34 RIRGN aun an eae ru App 13 PIRG sii ecd eR App 3 RIF Roe nino noo ee App 23 RISEND 43 Ie d dan App 18 RITO n t et t App 26 PANT Eu eee App 8 29 c
27. Cyclic communication Standby master station Station number 1 0 1 Controlling Cyclic beetfnunication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station returns to normal mode and system operation Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down Master station Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Station number 2 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 V N Standby master station Station number 0 Controlling Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page Cyclic communication x1 When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station the station number of the standby master station becomes 0 x2 When the master station returns to system operation as a standby master station the station number of the master station becomes the one specified in the Standby master station number in the network parameters 4 32 4 32 4 FUNCTION AS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Problem occurs in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied
28. Availability Address Read write y Reference Item Description Master Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section station station For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local 4000 16384 Ver 2 compatible intelligent device standby is remote input RX master stations ness ia 41 ne f For the local station Stores the input status from the master station For the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent ie ee gent Write only Section standby master 8 3 2 10 stations 16896 Ver 2 compatible For the local station Stores the output status to remote output RY 3 the master station ee Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other eee enabled local intelligent device standby master stations For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local SEE Write only intelligent device standby master stations Ver 2 compatible For the local station Stores the send data to the remote register master other 4400 17408 RWw local intelligent Master station device standby master 4BFF ones For sendin stations Read write Local station Also stores the receive For sending receiving data from the remote device other Section local intelligent 8 3 2 11 device standby master stations For the master station Stores the receive data from
29. Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte 11 40 11 40 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 3 4 Creating a program MELSEC Q This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Master station Master station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 k107D to x1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 1070 to Y1070 X150F to X1500 X151F to X1510 X152F to X1520 X153F to X1530 X154F to X1540 X155D to X1550 Ver 1 compatible buffer memory RXOOF to RX000 RXO1F to RX010 RXO2F to RX020 RX03F to RX030 RXO4F to RX040 RXOSF to RX050 RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 RYOOF to RY000 RYOTF to RYO10 RYO2F to RYO20 RYOGF to RYO30 RYO4F to RY040 RYO5F to RYO50 RYOGF to RYO60 RYO7F to RYO70 Ver 2 compatible buffer memor RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 RXO08F to RX080 RXO9F to RX090 RXOAF to RXOAO RXOBF to RXOBO Y150F to Y1500 Y151F to Y1510 Y152F to Y1520 Y153F to Y1530 Y154F to Y1
30. sse 11 45 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS 12 1 12 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 1 to 13 21 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence ssssssssssssssseseeeeennetet nennen tnnt nne trennen nni 13 1 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Received During Data 13 8 13 3 Error Gode Smin ast Haec i e he idea e dei Hat n ta Fee Ee o Flat o Hive ee ee 13 10 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer cccceeccecceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaesaesaseaesaesaeeeeseaeeaaes 13 16 Appendix 1 External Dimensions nennen nnns App 1 Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List sessesssssseseeeeeeennennennen nennen App 2 Appendix 2 1 RIRD instruUchon semearena an nennen nnne trennen nter nns App 3 Appendix 2 2 RIWT instruction sesssessesseesseeeeneeenenne nennen nennen trennen enne App 8 Appendix 2 3 RIRCV INSU Nissisen 13 Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction ccccccceccecseseeeeceeceeeeseceecaeceeeeaecaecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaesaeseaeeaeeaeeeseaseaes 18 Appendix 25 RIERUIBSITUGOLU s oiii itii eiit ri t PR IURE ER App 23 Appendix 2 6 RITO InStE CctlOn z o ier tror
31. 1 See the manual for the intelligent device station from which data will be read 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter Interlock signal storage devices Set data b15 to b8b7 to bo RY Request device 0 to 127 S2 0 0 RY Set the upper 8 bits to 0 0 user Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to b8 b7 to mn RWr 1 RX Error code storage device 0 to 15 zer If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn b15 to 5011 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and completion mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device App 14 App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RIRCV instruction Master station PLC CPU Command G RIRCV RX Buffer memory RY Device memory Receive buffer Master module Specified station Intelligent device station App 15 1 Accesses the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 Handshaking will be performed using the interlock signal specified by S2 2 Stores the data that is read in the re
32. 2 Remote inputfEiX Ver 2 Remote output PY Ver 2 Remote reaisterfRW1 Mer 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register W Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Z 24 Ri Scan mode setting Asynchronous E T Delay infomation setting 10 Station information setting t Remote device station initial settinc Interrupt setting E Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded setting Alreadyset Ready 00219 Host station NUM 2 Setthe network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x p Parameter name CC LinkM E 11 Y Data link disorder station setting
33. J 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS f MELSEC Q Set the station type using Type Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote I O net mode Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 6 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings lm Project E leplace View Online 20 ci E 1 1 a lea sees ada iss Program zl x it Eind Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Start 0 No 0000 Operational setting settings Type 4 4 Master station data link type Mode ele 5
34. d ner ei E 4 Pec eMe aire SA eu cn Meri Ue n 4 If a connected remote station local station intelligent device station or standby occupies Reserved station master station is specified as a reserved station data link with the specified station becomes disabled Setting method Set the reserved function in Station information setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer Make reserved station setting by choosing Station information setting Reserve invalid station select Make 0 points setting for the reserved station by choosing Station information setting Remote station points For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTION a MELSEC Q 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations anda standby master station that are powered off in the system configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations using the network parameter settings Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station problems occurring in that station can no longer be detected In addition the error invalid station settings cannot be changed while online because they are set with the network parameters Stations set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Master L
35. o RYO90 X109F to X1090 o RYOAO X10AF to X10A0 o RYOBO X10BF to X10B0 o RYOCO X10CF to X10CO o RYODO 11 25 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Ver 1compatible local station Ver 2compatible local station Master station station number 1 station number 5 ro Lal station p PLCCPU RWwoo Wooo0 RWwO1 wioot RWwO02 w1002 RWwo3 w1003 RWw04 wi004 H RWw05 H 1 1005 RWw06 W1006 RWwoD W100D RWwOE W100E L Rwwor LL W100F C Rwroo J wooo0 i I RWrIOT W0001 RWr02 W0002 RWr03 W0003 RWr04 W0004 n 05 4 0005 RWr06 W0006 Master station Ver 2 compatible RWrOD Wo00D Ver 2 compatible Local station PLC CPU buffer memory RWr0E WO00E buffer memory PLC CPU RWr00 ILL RwroF L WOO0F i C Rwwoo RWr01 eins Sok n aue tette see RWwO1 RWr02 RWwO2 RWr03 RWwo3 RWr04 RWwO4 RWr05 RWw05 RWr06 RWw06 RWrOD RWwOD RWr0E i RWwOE RWr0F RWwOF RWr10 E RWwIO RWr11 RWwit RWri2 Rww12 RWr13 RWr14 RWr15 4 RWw15 RWr16 RWwi6 RWr1D RWw1D RWrE RWw1E RWr1F C
36. s SES 462 62 nu JM QwCPU tc e Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 98 0 06 Example When the PLC CPU type is the QOGHCPU the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master station and 2048 points of RX 2048 points of RY 256 points of RWw 256 points of RWr 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file register KM1 2 X HRX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 0 16 0 00043 2048 2048 512 256 X 16 256 16 512 X 16 16 0 16 0 00043 X 2048 2048 512 4096 4096 8192 16 0 16 0 00043 20992 16 0 72416 0 72 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Remote net additional mode Expression KM1 KM2 X H RX RX2 RY RY2 SB RWw RWw2 X 16 RWr RWI2 X 16 SW X 16 16 aE ms aE KM3 X RX RX2 RY RY2 SB RWw RWw2 X 16 RWr RWr2 X 16 SW X 16 16 RX Points of the remote input RX refreshed by the master local station RX2 Points of the ver 2 remote input RX refreshed by the master local station RY Points of the remote output RY refreshed by the master local station RY2 Points of the ver 2 remote output RY refreshed by the master local station RWw Points of the remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station RWw2 Points of the ver 2 remote register RWw refreshe
37. Operational settings 2 Network parat Master station X gt 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start 2 El Device memory Remote netVer 2 mode I Device init connect count 2 Remote input FiX 1000 Remote output RY Y1000 Remote reaister Awr wa Remote register ww 1000 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i Scan mode settine Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information o Remote device station initial Interrupt setting mm __ Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setif it is needed eady lost station Read Q02 H H i D NUM 10 24 10 24 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 3 Initial setting of the remote device station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 10 25 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target station numbers to 1 and 4 Remote device station initial setting Target statio
38. 10 22 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 24 10 2 3 Initial setting of the remote device station ssseeneeeennenenn 10 25 1 Setting the target station number sse nennen nnns nnns 10 25 2 Setting the regist procedure registration essent tnn 10 25 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings 10 29 10 24 Creating a program zoe tre rt ehe Dre epe d Dra pre eee 10 32 10 2 5 Performing the data 10 36 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display seen 10 36 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 10 37 10 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used sssseseeeeeere nenne 10 38 10 31 Config ring a System 2 unii ipee de 10 38 1 Setting the master station cccccceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeaecaecaeeaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseetaesaeseeeeateats 10 39 2 Setting the remote device station trennen 10 40 10 3 2 Setting the master station parameters sss 10 42 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 5 1 10 42 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station
39. 5 Interrupt settings _ Indispensable settings No setting Already set Set if itis needed No setting Already set PLC parameter 002 Host station Ovrwrte NUM 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 4 Setthe refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET H network a Example of automatic refresh parameter settings An example of automatic refresh parameter settings is shown below zMELSOFT series GX loper Unset m Setting the CC Link list Project Edit Find F Online dow 2 cl Beine 7 ep tla s 15 Jalal a a 1 Habe al sil ses a 8 tol amp xm I E E Unset project No of boards in module J Boards Blank no setting 9 08 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 5 18 P
40. Default value 0101 Ver 1compatible remote I O station Occupies 1 station Station number 1 to 0140 Ver 1compatible remote I O station Occupies 1 station Station number 64 Storage area See below b15 to 0612611 0867 to Staion type Number pt stations Station number 1H Occupies 1 station 1 to 64 20h first module 32 first module 2H Occupies 2 stations 01H to 40H to to Station information 3H Occupies 3 stations 64th module 95 64th module Occ pies 4 stations Ver 1 compatible remote I O station 1H Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 1 compatible intelligent device station 5H Ver 2 compatible single remote device station 6u Ver 2 compatible single intelligent device station 8H Ver 2 compatible double remote device station 9H Ver 2 compatible double intelligent device station BH Ver 2 compatible quadruple remote device station CH Ver 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device station EH Ver 2 compatible octuple remote device station FH Ver 2 compatible octuple intelligent device station Stores the buffer memory assignment status at transient transmission to the local intelligent device and standby master stations Default value Send buffer size 40 64 word Receive buffer size 40 64 word Automatic update buffer size 80 128 word Storage area Communication buffer 0 word no setting or 40 64 word to 10004 4096 word Note that
41. Hold input data of CPU STOP setting I Cleats compulsorily Cancel d Setthe input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name Enean z r Data link disorder station setting r Case of CPU STOP setting T Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name sy e stati 1 z r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting i Tz Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station g Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1
42. R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register Pe emer eee Er RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 11 16 11 16 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 Retr n im Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1 to 10 iimodules station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Stop gt continue Scan mode setting Asynehrongus synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified Siasa Expanded Number of Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word N Station type cyclic setting eee points station select stations Send Receive Automatic 1 Ver 1Intelligent device station single oe 128 points No setting 64 64 128 Occupies Ver 2Intelligent device station 2 stations b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below cel melt SERIE BELT b al sinl 13 Program z
43. SWO088 0 Normal 6889 1 Abnormal 51 0089 b15 689 Other station fuse SWO0088 16 SWO08A blown status swoo89 32 68A SWO08A 48 SW008B SWO008B 68 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data link SW008C 0 No change 68CH 1 Change occurred SW008 680 Other station switch 008 SWo08E change status 3 ene 68E SW008D H SWOOBE WOOBF dd 68 m b15 b14 b12 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the line status Line status 0 Normal 1 Data link cannot be performed disconnected Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error SWO0094 0 No transient Transmission error 1 Transient transmission error occurrence 6944 SW0090 6901 SW0095 b15 614 b12 Transient 695 fe transmission SWO009 SW0096 status 3 0095 696 91 0096 SW0097 SWO0097 6974 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 7 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Offline Master station Local station Number Description
44. Station No 1 RWr size 64 404 2 number of occupied stations lt 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 2 RWr offset 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked 0 0 Station No 2 RWr size default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 3 RWr offset 4 40 Head buffer memory address RWr of station No 3 Station No 4 RWr offset 4C 401 Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No 4 Station No 4 RWr size 0 default Buffer memory size of RWr of station No 4 Station No 3 RWr size default Buffer memory size of RWr of station No 3 d 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 5 Link special relays SB The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON OFF data Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH correspond to link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF For details on the link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF see Section 8 4 1 The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5EOH to 5FFH and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address b15 bi4 b12 bii b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 5E0H F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 1 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 2 2 2 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 5 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 5E44 4E 4D 4C 4B 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
45. Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each module is not overlapped SW0098 0 Normal 6981 SW0099 6991 b15 b14 612 to b3 b2 Station number swooga overlap status f SW0998 694 SW0099 SWO09A SW009B 69 SW009B 1 Overlap station number first station number only Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the parameter settings A matching error occurs in any of the following cases 1 Station type mismatch Number of occupied stations mismatch Expanded cyclic setting mismatch CC Link compatible version mismatch A matching error will not occur when installation parameter For example a matching error will not occur when a remote device station is installed and the parameter setting is an intelligent device station 0 Normal SW009 1 Matching error 69D Loading parameter Example of matching error SWoOgE consistency status d 69 SW009C 69 Installation Parameter WOO9F Remote device station Remote station 69Fu Remote I O station Intelligent device station Remote device station b15 b14 612 to SW009C SW009D SW009E SWO009F Stores the line test 1 result SWO0B4 0 Normal 6 4 1 Abnormal WOOB5 b15 b13 b12 6 5 Line test 1 result 9 SWOOB4 16 13 00 6 0 5 32 29 9 18 17 WO00B7 SWO00B7 6B7u Store
46. Ver 2 atible E x Remote device station Ver 1 compatible oq TT Remote I O station Ver 1 compatible d Send station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Gus BENIN SUOTEEH Intelligent device Remote device Remote Master Local station station Station station station station Ver 2 mode Additional mode Ver1 mode Ve2 i Veri E Ve2 Veri area i area x10 O x o of x Cyclic transmission enabled Cyclic transmission disabled Prohibited 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Mismatch in number of points between parameter set expanded cyclic setting and installation status If there is a mismatch in the number of points between the parameter set expanded cyclic setting and installation status the QJ61T11N stores the error code into SWO0069 Also it stores the matching status of each station into SW009C 5 Precautions for modes between the master and local standby master stations At any of the following settings an error error code B3A0 will occur at the local station standby master station If the error has occurred correct the mode in the parameter of the master station local station standby master station and reset the PLC CPU The mode set at the master station differs from the mode set at the standby master station When the master station is se
47. 10 45 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 46 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Se
48. 128 X 16 128 128 X 16 512 X 16 16 0 22 0 00043 X 1920 1920 512 4096 4096 8192 16 0 22 0 00043 X 20763 16 0 77728 0 78 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 5 Station Status at Error Occurrence This section explains the status of each station at error occurrence 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Table 5 1 lists the operation of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station upon the occurrence of an error Table 5 1 The status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Master station standby master station when the master station is operating Remote output Remote Remote Remote input RX Input Output emote input RO nv register RWw register RWr When data link is stopped due to an error generated 1 1 Conti ai Conti Hold Conti by the master station PLC CPU data link continue E ibas 9 When data link is stopped due to an error generated Remote I O station Data link status by the local station PLC CPU data link continue When data link for the entire system is communication error power off etc occurs in a remote station When a communication error power off etc
49. 4 to F5u F6H to F7H F8H to 9 ation Buffer memory address 160 to 161H 162u to 163H 164 to 165H 166u to 167H 168 to 169H 16Au to 16B 16 to 16D 16 to 16F 170H to 171H 172 to 173H 1744 to 175 176H to 177H 178u to 179 MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 FAH to FBH 15 to FDH 16 FEH to FFH 17 100H to 101H 18 102H to 103H 19 104u to 105u 20 106u to 107H 21 108 to 109H 22 10 to 10BH 23 10 to 10DH 24 10 to10FH 25 110H to 111 26 112 113H Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 114 to 115 28 116 117 29 118 119 30 11 11 31 11 11Du 32 11 11 33 120 121H 34 122 123 35 124 125 36 126 127 37 128 129 38 12 12 39 12 120 Station Buffer memory number address 40 12 to 12 41 130 131 42 132 to 133 43 134 135 44 136 to 137 45 138 139 46 13Au to 13 47 13Cuto 130 48 13Ex 13FH 49 140H to 141H 50 142 to 143 51 144 to 145 52 146 147 Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory ad
50. 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station This function sets the input receiving data from a data link faulty station 1 Applicable input receiving data Master station Remote input RX Remote I O station station number 1 Remote device station station number 2 Local station station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas Local station station number 4 Remote output RY Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Station numb
51. 6 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of the master station 7 The data in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored automatically for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the local station 8 The input status stored in the buffer memory remote input RX is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 1 Local station Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX to Rvoo 7 RxoFtoRxoo l 7 RxoFtoRxoo RY1D to RY10 J U IIRX1D to RX10 J LIIRXITD to RX10 RY2FtoRY20 RX2FtoRX20 RX2FteRX20 to RY30 RX3F to RX30 RX3F to RX30 RY4F to RY40 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 RYsFto RY50 7 J RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50 RY6F to RY60 RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60 RYZFtoRY70 RX7F to RX70 RX7FtoRX70 1 RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 RX8F to RX80 to RYZTEFtoRY7TFO IAX7FF to The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the mas
52. A X 15 2 900 B X 50 3 For C lt 26 1200 C X 100 For C gt 26 3700 C 26 X 25 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME MELSEC Q EX Constant only when remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is used 50 total in the following table Number of occupied i Occupies Occupies Occupies Occupies 1 station 2 stations 3 stations 4 stations Expanded cyclic setting single L w wx n oou Pare 70x Number of 80 x Number of 90 x Number of 100 Number ouble stations stations stations of stations 90x Number of 110 x Number 130 x Number 150 X Number quadruple stations of stations of stations of stations 110 x Number 160 Number 210 x Number 260 Number of stations of stations of stations of stations octuple F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 BT X 1 number of retries TR Transient processing time only when a transient request is made 5 When there is a transient request from the master station 180 X BT When there is a transient request from the local station 40 8 X BT X number of transient transmission stations Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station or transient transmission Station Station Station Station number 819
53. Aa Aa i Ein sean 1 HHHH HHHH HHHH Response time of the first station _ Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station i Responses from remote H i H I O stations A C e au NE 1 Input 1 Input2 i i ai i MES 1 1 I gt 1 11 gt gt IV 1 1 1 4 Transmission delay time l Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Sequence scan Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan Eee He e t Master station buffer memory Remote input RX Link scan IH HH HH KH HHH Response time of the first station __ E T i i 1 i 1 J 1 i i 1 j i Response time of the corresponding station i Response time of the final station i i i i Responses from remote H H 1 i stations 4 i 1 a C i 1 l 1 1 Input 1 Input 2 i 0 0 OU Cos i i i 1 I gt lt Il gt lt IV 9 i f 1 4 Transmission delay time l Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station I
54. Automatic refresh Master station Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Link scan Link scan Link scan Link scan b Transient transmission Read RIRD or write RIWT operation of the local station buffer memory and CPU device can be performed at any timing Master station Transient transmission area Transient transmission Transient transmission Transient transmission Transient transmission Local station Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Local station Transient transmission area Buffer memory Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh MELSEC Q PLC CPU Ew PLC CPU 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU 4 Intelligent device station communication Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 4 a Cyclic transmission Signals for handshaking with the intelligent device station positioning start positioning complete etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr Automatic refresh Master station Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
55. Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 Parameter name Number of exclusive stations ICC LinkL Exclusive station 1 bd r Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data single x r of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 bl r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting cum Am T Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting nds Clears compulsorily L Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not c
56. ES H et POWER L s o 2 UP TEM P LRUN 3 DOWN a 15 1 0 4 io 0 10 0 20 5 n tao DEN 6 jn o g 7 gt L ER 8 NICA CON C JP i Ww E CON R D MITSUBISHI CCunx PA V 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE Station number setting switch Transmission speed setting switch or Lov For Fore Fore Fore A o Station number 4 o 2 2 x E ay oo mm 156kbps o q IIIS 2 INIS e s 8 8 B RATE 3 Ver 2 Mode Nomal mode M J MELSEC Q 10 21 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Default Clear Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remot
57. First module station number 4 2080 Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Receive buffer 20FFu Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Send buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Receive buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lg Project Edt Find Feplace View Onine Diagnostics Tools Window 1815 20 e EENE tee leli zi es ase i8 AFA S amp e 415 ele Eel z 3 4 x j seul lel SRA a e e e s Program sr Eie al see eden ele sono Unset project No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program RF Device comment 1 2 3 0 Stat 1 0 No Operational setting Operati Type Master station 5 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto stat z 18 Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode JR Device init connect count 5 Remote input
58. For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby Read only master stations For the local station Stores the perc n status perc n the master station 224 to m E EXE For the master station Stores the output status to the intelligent Write only Section device standby master 8 3 2 2 stations 160 352 2 For the local station Stores the output status to to Remote output RY the master station 1DFi 479 Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other local intelligent enabled device standby master stations For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local Write only intelligent device standby master stations Remote register For the local station Stores the send data to the ie RWw 2 master other Master station local intelligent Section For sending device standby master 8 3 2 3 2DFu 735 stations Local station Read write ER Also stores the receive For sending receiving data from the remote enabled device other local intelligent device standby master stations O Available Not available PR RAMMIN RES 2 MELSEC Q Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 2 3 Address 7 Availability Description Read write TET Reference cd aster Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility station station For the master station Stores the receive data Remote reg
59. Intelligent device station MELSEC Q Servo amplifier Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote input input RX RX Remote Linie Scan Remote 7 7 output output RY RY f Remote Link scan Remote register register RWw RWw LU Remote Link scan Remote register register RWr RWr b Transient transmission Read RIRD or written RIWT operation of the intelligent device station PLC CPU buffer memory can be performed at any timing Master station Transient transmission area Intelligent device station Transient transmission Buffer memory Transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Parameter setting by GX Developer or the dedicated instruction There are two parameter setting methods the parameters can either be set by GX Developer or by using a dedicated instruction see Sections 2 2 1 4 2 5 and 4 2 6 The following table lists the differences between the two setting methods Program requirement setting for Automatic refresh Number of CPUS that can be mounted Changing the parameter settings while the PLC CPU is parameters Parameter setting with Not required 4 modules x GX Developer Parameter setting with Required x 64 modules dedicated instruction 6 System down prevention Slave station cut off funct
60. Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR PO Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Remote output RorZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R Remote register RWw or ZR RWr lic er 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR ee CERT Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorZR Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR RWr Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R RWw or ZR i SB L B SW LB pe pecial relay Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR pecial register 11 19 11 19 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 __ Automatic reconnection R o station count Default 1 OoOo Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby ma
61. STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below eT ST al sfr ale Ta zi EET al zizi oles 2 2 m TIGE No of boards in module hz Boards Blank no setting 89 8 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 2 3 2 13 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational 0 erational settings Network E Master station gt 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start E Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode E II Device init All connect count 2 Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register E wr WO Remote reaister E w w W1000 Ver 2 Remote input AX Ver 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote Ver 2 Remote reaisterfE ww Special rel
62. The data content to be written to the remote registers RWwO to RWwn is predefined for each remote device station 4 8 4 8 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations digital output values detected temperature I i Numeric data such as 1 value etc i f 1 Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values detected temperature value etc Signal direction AJ65BT 64AD Master module Address Description RWwO CH1 digital output value RWw1 CH digital output value RWw2 CH3 digital output value RWw3 CHA digital output value RWw4 Error code RWw5 RWw6 Not used RWw7 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and local stations 1 Communication between the master and local stations by cyclic PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refres
63. WEINE 51 0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter 670 stations 1 to 64 stations Stores the maximum station number setting of the station number setting switch that is performing data link 1 to 64 stations SW0072 Number of connected Stores the number of modules that are performing data link 6729 modules SW0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 station number 1 to 64 stations Stores the reserved station setting status 0 Not reserved station 1 Reserved station SW0071 communication 6714 station number SW0074 6749 SW0075 b15 614 b12 6754 Reserved station 510074 SW0076 status 3 10075 32 676 5110076 48 SW0077 SW0077 64 6779 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the error invalid station setting status 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station SW0078 6784 SW0079 b15 014 6013 b12 6791 Error invalid station Swo078 SWO007A specified status 3 SW0079 67 SW007A SW007B SW007B 67B Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 5 8 Availability O Available x Not available Online Offl
64. YIOIA XIOIA 261 4 RST voa q Turns off error reset J request flag RY1A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting X151B AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 2641 H MOvP 500 w500 CH 1 digital value Digital value setting RWwO 500 setting 4 CH digital value WovP K1000 1501 setting RWw1 1000 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable settin X151B BREST Turns on CH 1 analog 290 KX a 4 output enable disable Analog output flag RYOO enable x Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing flag RYO1 X151A BMOVP 1000 0510 K2 Read CH C check code 319 RWr0 RWr1 MOVP W1008 D518 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset T FSET YI51A Turns on error reset I J request flag RY1A Y151A X151A RST 151 Turns off error reset request flag RY1A MCR NO 1 RE im 1 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 51 10 51 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 4 Creating a program This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually us
65. d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Setthe special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net additional mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station Station Station Station number2 number 4 number8 number 9 Ver 2 2 Station Ver 1 Ver 2 compatible M ster
66. 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 8 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 5F9H 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 5 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1 7 1A6 1 5 1A4 1 3 1A2 1A1 1A0 5FBH 1BF 1 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 106 105 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1CO 5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 107 106 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 101 1DO 5 1EF 1 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1EO 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1 2 1F1 1FO 8 PROGRAMMING 6 MELSEC Q Link special registers SW The link special registers store the data link status using word data Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF For more details on the link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF see Section 8 4 2 Random access buffer The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission Com
67. 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When the number of points for data used in the instruction exceeds the available range or storage data and constants of a device specified by the instruction exceeds the available range including dummy devices The number of points required for each data is shown below Control data Slave station setting data Reserved station specification data Error invalid station specification data 8 points 64 points 4 points 4 points Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data 78 points Example Assume that data link registers DO to D12287 are available for the QO2CPU If the device head number of the slave station setting data is set to D12284 because there are only 4 slave stations the PLC CPU nonetheless checks the range from D12284 to D122347 for 64 stations and an error indicating that the available range is exceeded occurs App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example This program sets the network parameters for the master module mounted at the numbers X Y00 to X Y1F and starts the data link Station number 1 Master Local Station number 2 Station number 3 station NOE e qaot station Remote I O station Remote I O station occupies ah i gi X YOO to 1F d Error invalid station 1 Reserved station 1 station o occupies 1 station occupies 1 station Refresh of
68. 400C 420D RY DF to RY DO RX DF to RXDO 4000 RX9F to RX90 40094 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 11 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw RWr Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station RWw remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 Example Remote device station Local station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Address Remote register RWr Address 4400 RWr 0 4 00 Station 4401 RW dt 7 RWr1 4 01 Station numberi 442 ft RWww2 If oy RW 2 4coz number 1
69. 7 Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1 9 1CAu to 1 1CCH 1CEu to 1 1DOu to 1D1H 1D2u to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 107 108 109 10 to 10 10 100 10 to 1 O T Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address FAH to FCH to FDH FEH to FFH 100 to 101H 102 to 103H 104 to 105H 106 to 107H 108 to 109H 10 to 10BH 10 to 10DH 10 to10FH 110 to 111H 112 113H number Station Buffer memory address H to 115 H to 117H H to 119H H to 11BH H to 11DH H to 11FH Hto 121H H to 123H H to 125 H to 127H H to 129H H to 12BH H to 12DH number Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12F 130 to 131 132 to 133 134 to 135 136 to 137 138H to 139 1 to 13B 13CH to 13D 1 to 13F 140 to 141H 142 to 143H 144 to 145H 146 to 147H Station number Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14BH 14 to 14DH 14 to 14 150 to 151H 152 153 154 155 156 to 157 158 159 15 15 15 to 150 15 15 8 PROGRAMMING 3 Remote registers RWw and RWr Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected MELSEC Q
70. 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWTi nstruction OT 15 BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant a 51 1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 X 12 1 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms 2 Local station gt master station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the local station until a response from the master station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 72 1x 1 13 SM ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant URN SM Master station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link
71. A 15 UA EE A 15 nho A 15 PRY erint nhi b nt E D A 15 Index 3 S T SB Ed ases A 15 Scan mode setting information 8 29 Scan synchronous function 1 10 4 57 Selecting a mode according to the system 1 9 Setting checklist App 42 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station 1 7 4 28 Slave station cut off function 1 6 4 25 Slave station offset size information 8 17 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 1 12 4 29 Special function module A 15 Standby master function 1 7 4 31 Standby master station A 14 Standby master station information 8 29 Standby master station number 8 34 Station number overlap checking FUNCIO RE E 1 10 4 63 Station number overlap status 8 37 Station number setting 7 13 Station number setting switches 7 5 Station status at error occurrence 5 44 SM uem oc ER Roter ee i eee t s A 15 Switch setting esses 7 13 Switch setting status 8 29 8 34 System configuration sss 2 1 System down
72. Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select x i i Scan mode settini g z Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial ___Interupt setting Interuptsettinas 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set eady lost station Read Q02 H H i D NUM 11 8 11 8 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 1 4 Creating a program Master station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 X107D to X1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 Y107D to Y1070 11 9 MELSEC Q This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Master station Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Local station PLC CPU RYOOF to RYooo Y100F t
73. Bins rate 21214 miel 212 sir a ele lal B ioe Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 91 8 Program HF Device comment i 2 3 E wf Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational setine Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Master station E Eg 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x x x ED Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode x I Device init connect count 2 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote register Rw w Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputf RY Ver 2 Remote registerfR wr Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i i Scan mode settinc Asynchronous g Delay infomation settinu 0 Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial settinc lntemuptsetting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset s Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte NUM SCRL 11 17 11 17 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
74. CH Digital output value output value D1501 CH2 EE output value Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU Remote device station E number 1 er 3 stations 10 17 10 17 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used 10 2 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system where one ver 1 compatible remote device station and one ver 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 18 10 18 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 ire CL DG 9
75. Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data ON ww orc 10 48 10 48 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13 BEOH b13 Table 10 3 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Berhol device station the initialization procedure registration 580000 While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and 5E0n b13 initialieation procedure remote registers stops Qik di 5 registration instruction s OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOOSE Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure SE5u b14 device station initialization DFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SE device station init
76. Hr M wc NO M100 1 5080 0 1 90 NO M100 Initial settings X1018 25 7 7 Wo 7 Yi009 Changing of initial settings Initial setting change asit wovP w100 OVP H30 W101 MOVP K16 W105 MOVP 200 7 SET Yi009 Processing at initial settings 0000 X1018 A 4 0 4 RST yoi X1019 H 82 3 RST yioig Read of digital output values X101B X1000 m 84 Mov WO D500 J X1001 Mv D501 1 Processing at error occurrence X101A 107 MOVP W8 D508 Error reset Y101A Y101A X101A RST Y101A MCR NO 1 e 1 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings changed 10 12 MELSEC Q program is shown AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 i Aver
77. RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting W150C Reserved W150D RWwD Reserved W150E RWE Reserved W150F RWwF Reserved Ver 2compatible for read W1000 RWO CH 1 checi hec 8 Error code Reserved RWrA Reserved Reserved RWrC Reserved RWrD Reserved RWrF Reserved 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN wc NO M100 Xo XOF Xi 5800 0 0 E E J_ gy NO M100 Initialization procedure registration SBOF 38 RST XI01B X151B I 34 X1018 56 SET X1518 AJeSVBTCU 68ADV initial setting change G 000000 Initial setting change 59 wovP OVP H30 MOVP 200 KIG SET X1019 90 RST AJ65VBTCU 68ADV digital output value read X101B 1000 92 MOV WO X1001 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 124 OVP W8 Error reset SET Y101A X101A 149 ME RST The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 54 SBOD SBOD W100 W101 W103 W105 Y1019 Y1019 D500 D501 D508 Y101A MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN
78. Remote output RY is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations CY ER TEE mette E E e enr S 0 5 IR pq eee E ETE Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote output RY RYOF to Rvoo RYOF to RYOO Handshaking signals such RY1F to RY10 5 RY1F to RY10 request flag i and initial data processing i RY2F to RY20 _______________ jog complete flag i 4 J RY3F to RY30 E ae pa RY4F to RY40 RvoF to RYOO RYSF to RY50 9 RYIF to 10 _RY6F to RY6O a INN 1 RY7F to RY70 Pali ea ea d RY8F to RY8O Eo to to RY7FO ZEE Signal direction Master module AJ65BT 64AD Signal name Selection of offset gain values Selection of voltage current RY02 to Not used RY17 RY18 RY19 Initial data processing request flag RY1A Error reset request flag RY1B to Not used RY1F 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The t
79. Ror ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX _ Device name Select from X M L D W Ror ZR d Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR RW RWw or ZR Special relay S Device name Select from M L B D W R SBor Alo Special EUIS Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote output RY 10 42 10 42 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 R Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 1 modules Default 1 station count Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank 799 master station Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Stop gt continue Scan mode setting Asynchronous synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Station k Expanded Number of Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word No Station type cyclic setting occupied station points station select stations Send Receive Automatic Occupies 1 Ver 1Remote device station single 3 stations 96 points No setting Ver 2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below LSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list
80. S to Remote register RWr 2 Receive area from master station Receive area from master e station to 1 1 Remote register RWw Hoststation 13 station number 1 Link scan gt send area Receive area 13 station No 2 to Local station station number 2 Network parameters Buffer memory Receive area from local station No 1 Host station station number 2 send area Remote input RX Receive area from master station eceive area from master station Remote register RWr Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWw Receive area from local station No 1 Host station station number 2 send area PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters 5 Automatic refresh gt 2 Automatic refresh Y Automatic refresh 8 Automatic refresh H 11 Automatic refresh 11 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh 12 Automatic refresh 4 10 4 FUNCTIONS PLC CPU Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system starts up automatically MELSEC Q On off data from a local station to the master station or other local stations The on off data of the
81. SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20 1 X 3 10 70 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw local station RWr This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms S
82. Sequence program RLPASET instruction link is started PLC CPU Program memory Master station PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Program memory PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction Parameter area Network parameter Master station Parameter area Network parameter 6 PARAMETER SETTIN MELSEC Q 6 2 Parameter Setting Items Table 6 1 lists the items to be stored in the master station parameter memory Table 6 1 Parameter setting items 1 2 a Reference Master Local Standby Setting item Description master section station station station Sets the input data status from the data link disorder station Data link disord r station Default value Clear Section Setting range Hold input data 4 3 4 Clear Sets whether slave stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared in case of PLC CPU STOP Section Default value Refresh 435 Setting range Refresh y Clears compulsorily Sets the number of occupied local and standby master stations Default value Occupies 1 station x Setting range Occupies 1 to 4 stations Makes the expanded cyclic setting of the local station Default value single Setting range single double quadruple octuple Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station
83. Specify the buffer memory size of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter x3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A mode QnACPU AnUCPU and reads the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 32 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffers in master station and local station lt Link special rely Link specialregister 2 Device memory in the PLC CPU woa Eu ries esee ar Wu ret mem Intemalrelay M O Decima _ 0 O Jj Dema So B O Hexadecimal 29 Timer contact T O 09 Timercot t o Jj Dooma o Fmerrsenvau T Deima 0 Retentive timer contact st O Dedma Retentive imer co s O Deima sm Retentive timer present value st Dedma Counter contact c O Dema m E Cowter pesenvau c Decima im Dataregister D O Dema Linkregister w Hexadecimal 2m T Rn pami 8 Special iink reay O Hexadecimal _ 69 Special ink register sw Hexadecimal Specialrelay sd O p 4 Specialregister s o Dema 4 Devices other than shown above can
84. Y30 to Y4F Table 8 1 I O signal list Signal direction PLC CPU lt Master local module Signal direction PLC CPU Master local module xo Moe O o vo Xm Hosdaalnksaus m X2 JUsepohbtd w Otherstationdatalink status Xn4 Yn4 Xn6 Yn6 Xn9 Use prohibited Yn9 XnC YnC xr o vwe Tm Use prohibited X n1 F Y n 1 F 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q IMPORTANT The use prohibited output signals shown in Table 8 1 are accessed by the system and cannot be accessed by the user In the event these signals are used turned on off by the user normal operations cannot be guaranteed In the A QnA series data link startup was performed by setting the Yn6 Data Link Startup Request initiated by a buffer memory parameter and Yn8 Data link Startup Request initiated by E 7PROM parameter Do not use Yn6 and Yn8 for the Q series because the data link startup is automatically performed 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 2 2 Details of the I O signals The following explains the on off timings and conditions of the I O signals shown in Table 8 1 1 Module error XnO This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty OFF Module normal ON Module error Module error Xn0 Module ready XnF Host data link status Xn1 This signal indicates the data link status of the host
85. a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station response time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station RY remote device station RY This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote device station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station
86. continue when an error causing the operation to stop such as SP UNIT ERROR occurs in the PLC CPU at the master station With errors enabling the operation to continue such as BATTERY ERROR the data link will continue regardless of the setting see Section 4 3 3 9 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station The data entered received from a data link faulty station can be cleared or the previous status immediately before the error can be maintained see Section 4 3 4 10 Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station backup station for the master station if a malfunction occurs in the master station due to a malfunction of the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to online even during data link control by the standby master station and prepares itself for standby master station system down see Section 4 3 6 Standby master station Data link control by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 a Mis Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station Master station Station n
87. essssssssssssssssssseeeeeennet nennen 11 31 11 3 2 Setting the master station parameters sse 11 32 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station ssssssssssseeeeennee 11 32 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 11 34 11 3 3 Setting the local station parameters sse 11 35 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 11 35 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station Station number 1 ee Ire ne eere rtp arte trate ha rr ding Oe RD frg 11 37 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 11 38 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station numb6el 5 s sitienti eie imn etae inan id 11 40 11 3 4 Creating a program arininn iaaea ieia Aaaa aAA 11 41 1 Master station prOgram eet oet Lade b Ho 11 43 2 Local station program Lose lace Lave Lace La i n n a e e a ais 11 43 11 3 5 Performing the data link 2 tette tt actetuer en Eheu 11 44 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 11 44 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program
88. o X1510 X1520 o X1530 X1540 0 11 41 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Ver 1compatible local station Ver 2compatible local station station 2 00 2 ERE station number 5 o j Ver 1 compatible Local station Ver 1 compatible Local station PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU W0000 RWw00 w1000 RWwOO wo100 wo0001 RWw01 W1001 RWwO1 W0101 W0002 RWw02 wi002 RWw02 WO0102 W0003 RWwO03 W1003 RWwO03 W0103 W0004 RWw04 W1004 RWw04 W0104 W0005 RWw05 1005 RWwO05 W0105 W0006 RWw06 wi006 RWw06 W0106 W0007 RWwO07 W1007 RWw07 W0107 W0008 RWw08 w1008 RWw08 W0108 W0009 RWwO09 w1009 RWwO9 W0109 WO000A RWwOA W100A RWwOA WO010A WO00B RWwOB W100B RWwOB WO010B WO00C RWwOC W100C RWwOC WO010C WO00D RWwOD W100D RWwOD WO010D WO00E RWwOE W100E RWwOE WO010E WOO0F L LL RWwOF w100F J RWwOF W010F W0100 Rwroo W0000 Rwr00 W0000 W0101 RWr01 W0001 RWr01 W0001 wo102 RWr02 woo02 RWr02 wo002 W0103 Rwr03 WO003 RWr03 W0003 W0104 RWr04 wo004 RWr04 W0004 W0105 RWr05 woo05 RWr05 W0005 W0106 Rwr06 WO0006 RWwr06 W0006 W0107 RWr07 W0007 RWr07 W0007 W0108 RWr08 wooo8 RWr08 W0008 W0109 RWr09 wooo9 Rwr09 W0009 WO010A RWr0A WO00A RWr0A W000A WO010B RWr0B
89. r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data p Case of CPU STOP setting 7 2 zi Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name j r E e station 1 n r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked r Parameter name p Number 0 i r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r of CPU STOP setting 9 irj Clears compulsoribi J 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station 9 Set the CC Link mode u
90. 0 o Hr M ME wc NO M100 9080 0 90 NO M100 Initialization procedure registration 1018 SBOD SBOD C Changing of initial settings Su err so aces Pp ferta gr equum Initial setting change MOVP 100 MOVP H30 101 wove 200 W103 MOVP W105 SET Y1019 x1019 64 RST Y1019 Readofdigitalouputvalues Xi01B 1000 66 Mov Wo D500 X1001 MOV Wi D501 Processing at error occurrence Xi01A 89 w8 D508 Error reset SET YIOIA YiO1A XIO1A 2 105 Mt RST Y101A 108 MCR NO 109 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 15 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal Turns on initialization procedure registration directive Turns off initialization procedure registration directive A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 15 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER S
91. 1 to 64 ome All module Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR OSES Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Remote output Ror ZR R Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR g C ST D W Devi Remote register RWw evice name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR er 2 Remote input R Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR s D W te rei r Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR RWr SB Ver Ver SS O RX L B ee 5 Fl mo tput RY Device name Select from Y M L B C ST D W R or ZR 2 Remo iste MERC Aa aH Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B T ST D W RWw or ZR pecial relay Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR pecial register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 11 6 11 6 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 __ Automatic reconnection R o station count Default 1 OoOo Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous TT Scan mode setting Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below
92. 2 average time number of times setting RWw6 CH 3 average time number RWWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting 5 average time number of times setting RWw9 CH 6 average time number of times setting RWWA CH 7 average time number of times setting RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting Ver 1compatible for read W000 RWr0 CH 1 digital output value W001 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value RWr2 CH 3 digital output value RWr3 CH 4 digital RWr4 CH 5 digital RWr5 CH 6 digital al RWr7 CH 8 digital RWr8 RWr9 Reserved RWrA RWrB Error code Reserved Reserved Ver 2compatible for write W1001 RWr1 CH 2 chec RWr2 CH 3 checl hec W1500 RWWwO CH 1 digital value setting W1501 RWw1 CH 2 digital value setting W1502 RWw2 CH 3 digital value setting W1503 RWw3 CH 4 digital value setting W1504 RWw4 CH 5 digital value setting W1505 9 RWw5 CH 6 digital value setting W1506 RWw 6 CH 7 digital W1507 RWw7 8 digital value setting W1508 RWw8 Analog output enable disable setting W1509 RWw9 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting W150A RWWwA CH 5 to CH 8 output range setting W150B J
93. 3 Intelligent device module A 14 Intelligent device station A 14 1 1 Intelligent device station communication 1 5 Intelligent function module A 15 Internal current consumption 3 1 LED display 7 5 Lire Status 5 creen 8 36 aiutato 7 15 Line test 8 37 Line test 1 result 8 37 Line test acceptance status 8 27 Index 2 Line test complete status 8 28 Line test request 8 26 Line test result ssesssssss 8 32 Line test station setting 8 31 Link refresh time sesssssssssss 5 40 Link Umea eaaa iaa naaraana 5 1 Link special relays SB 8 19 8 26 Link special registers SW 8 20 8 31 Local module esses A 14 Local StatiOn ioc etes A 14 1 1 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 15 6 27 6 40 Local station communication 1 4 Local station network parameter Settings a dert 6 12 6 24 6 37 Loading status sse 8 33 Loading parameter consistency status 8 37 Loop test 13 19 Master module
94. 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 2 3 1 1 5 42 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr remote device station RWr This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the data for the CPU device is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple m a d s 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link
95. 33BH 24 33CH to 33FH 25 340H to 343H 26 344 to 347H Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 348 to 34BH 28 4 to 4 29 350H 353H 30 354 to 357H 31 358H to 35BH 32 35CH to 35FH 33 360H to 363H 34 364H to 367H 35 368H to 36BH 36 36CH to 36FH 37 370H to 373H 38 374 to 377H 39 378 to 37BH Station Buffer memory number address 40 37Cu to 37FH 41 380H to 383H 42 384H to 387H 43 388H to 38BH 44 38CH to 38FH 45 390H to 393H 46 394H to 397H 47 398H to 39Bu 48 39CH to 39FH 49 3A0H to 50 4 to 3A7H 51 3A8H to 3ABH 52 to 3AFH Station number Buffer memory address 3B0u to 3B3H 4 to 3B7H 3B8H to 3BBH 3BCu to 3C0H to 3C3H 4 to 7 3C8H to to 3DOnu to 3D3H 3D4n to 3D7H 3D8u to 3DBH 3DCH to 3DFH Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 214uto 217 218 to 21B 21CH to 21F 220 to 223 224u to 227 228H to 22B 22Cu to 22F 230H to 233 234 to 237 238H to 23B 23 to 23F 240 to 243 244 to 247 number Station Buffer memory address H to 24BH H to 24FH H to 253H H to 257H H to 25BH H to 25FH H to 263H H to 267H 268 to 26 H to 26FH H to 273H Hto 277H H to 27BH number Station Buffer memory address 27CH to 27FH 280 to 283 284H to 287H 28
96. 7 10 19 10 19 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Setting of AJOBVBTCU 68ADV WELSEG AJ65VBTCU 68ADV CON A IL 1 N B SEL dl H j POWER 1 SE RUN 21 LRUN 3 a LERR Station number setting switch SWilo Transmission speed setting switch 0 4 o 0 10 S SM RS 4O Station o ber 1 _ 5 ES number 6 0 2 7 0 ES 156kbps cac je 8 STA V J D mN 5 Mode select switch N 0 Nomal mode CON M 2 IP MITSUBISHI CCtink 10 20 10 20 DEVICE STATIONS 10 21 Setting of AJOBVBTCU 68DAVN WELSHEAJ65VBTCU 68DAVN LEE MODE Mode select switch CON 1 con B SEL
97. CH 6 average time number of times setting RWWA CH 7 average time number of times setting RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting CH 1 digital value setting 2 digital value setting CH 3 digital value setting RWw3 CH 4 digital value setting 5 digital value setting CH 6 digital value setting CH 7 digital value setting RWw7 CH 8 digital value setting RWw8 Analog output enable disable setting RWw 9 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWwA CH 5 to CH 8 output range setting RWr6 CH 7 digital output value RWr7 CH 8 digital output value RWTr8 Error code RWr9 Reserved Reserved RWrB Reserved i RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting W1018 RWwC Reserved W1019 RWwD Reserved W101A RWE Reserved W101B RWwF Reserved For read wo000 Rwro CH 1 digital output value W0001 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value RWr2 CH 3 digital output value CH 4 digital output value RWr4 CH 5 digital output value RWr5 CH 6 digital output value RWrO RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 RWr5 RWr6 RWr7 RWr8 RWr9 Reserved RWrA Reserved RWrB Reserved RWC Reserved RWrD Reserved RWrE Reserved RWrF Reserved CH 1 check code CH 2 check code check code CH 4 che
98. CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station The remote output RY is used as output data in local 2 Master station Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX1D to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 station systems The data in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station and the remote output RY buffer memory of other local stations The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters The remote input RX is used as input data in local station systems The input status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 1 occupies 1 station RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations PLC CPU RY5F to RY50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RX8F to RX80 RY8F to RY80 RY6F to RY60 The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master and local stations 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q On off data from the master station to local stations
99. Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked r Parameter name p Number 0 i r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r of CPU STOP setting 9 irj Clears compulsoribi J 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station 9 Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 2 mode h Setthe total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that ca
100. Cancel For current cursor station Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring Close 4 FUNCTIONS 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link stop restart MELSEC Q This function stops and restarts local data links If the data link of the master station is stopped the data link of the entire system stops Setting method Set the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics in Diagnostics using the GX Developer a Specifying applicable module Address Execution of data link stop restart Perform these operations by setting Start Data Link or Stop Data Link in the network test Specify the module whose data link is stopped or restarted in Module setting Specification method Module No CC Link 7 CC Link LT Diagnostics x Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Host Station Master Station Ver 2 mode el gee CC Link 7 Data Link Status tat Data ya PE Js Module No h oz Action Status Noma P om C VoAddes Switching Status Master Station Curent B oom CCLink Bridge Using Loop wur Statior 678 0 Line status Nomi 7 CH 1 Line status EOC __ teles Newer Loop Type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station Set Data Link Stop Data Link 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function This function investigates the status of connected stations and checks for the ove
101. Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Additional mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings lm Project E leplace View Online 20 ci 1 a ses ada iss Program zl x it Eind Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window zz pel Ba ce l No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 1 2 3 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting settings 4 4 Operational Local station 4 Master station data link type Mode ele Remote net Additional mode 1000 Y10001 woj W100 1500 1500 1000 1500 SBO SWOI Indispensable setngs setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Project Ready 0 Host station I wwe 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select
102. Does the mode of the master station match the Check the parameters of the master station and start up and the ERR LED turns on mode of the local station standby master station local station standby master station Check that the parameter of the master station that will return to the system by the standby master Check the parameter of the master station function has not been rewritten Is the station set as an error invalid station Check the parameters Faulty stations cannot be detected Is the station number overlapped elsewhere Check the station number setting Can the faulty station be identified using the other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the switch settings for the faulty station e Check that the cable is properly wired Faulty stations are generated depending on TA Check that the shield of the cable is grounded transmission rate Te transmission rates reduced toa lower level e Connect the terminal resistor that matches the ve a on S ia be cable type used to the terminal stations located Perrone Aen or at each end of the CC Link system Check the error code for the PLC CPU Check the error code for the master station Has an error occurred Check the operation status of the PLC CPUs for both the master station and the corresponding local station Are there any errors in the initial settings of the e Check the parameters The remote dev
103. Error vs HEX Eror History DEC The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under HAW Information att monitor f Close b Product information The function version and serial No are displayed as follows 050320000000000 B Function Version B Serial No first 5 digits 13 20 13 20 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 21 MELSEC Q H W Information x Module Display format Module QJ61BT11N Product information 050320000000000 B HEX C DEC LED Information HAW SW Information Item Value Item Value Iten Value Item Value RUN 0001 156 0001 STNo x10 0000 STNo 0000 ERR 0000 625 0000 STNo xl 0000 3 STNo 0000 MST 0001 2 5 0000 MODE 0000 B RATE 0000 5 0000 5H 0000 MODE 0000 LOCAL 0000 10M 0000 CONFIG 0000 Su 0000 MS 0000 TEST 0000 0000 50 0000 TIME 0000 0000 LINE 0000 32 0000 Start monite Stop monitor Close H W LED Information The H W LED Information displays the following data link information mure 0j 0 At watchdog timer error ee Switching between 0 and 1 There is a faulty station 11 Setto the master station ooo y O MST 1 Set to the master station 1 A transmission speed of 156 kbps is selected Notused oo O Not used Not used d H W SW Information
104. FX 1000 Remote outputfRY 1000 Remote regiteiiwi wal Remote register Ww wind Ver2 Remote inoutfAX 1500 Ver Remote 1500 Ver 2 Remote recisterfRWi w000 Vet Remote registe RWw W150 Special relay SB 580 Special registeifSW E Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop z z E Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 30 Station information setting Sta Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set itm Ready 0 Host station wwe NUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within th
105. IN No of automatic return stations 8 33 No of retries information 8 33 Notes on the system configuration 2 6 Number of host occupied stations 8 29 Number of connected modules 8 34 Number of CPUs that can be installed 2 4 Number of I O occupied points 3 1 Number of link points per station 3 1 Number of occupied station 3 1 Offline test 8 28 Operation specification when CPU is down 8 29 Other station data link status 8 30 8 35 Other station fuse blown status 8 30 8 36 Other station monitoring 18 17 Other station switch change status 8 30 8 36 Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status 8 35 Other station watchdog timer error status 8 30 P Parameter 8 33 Parameter information read acknowledgment status 8 28 Parameter information read completion Stall 8 28 Parameter information read request 8 26 Parameter 6 1 Parameter receive
106. MELSEC Q 10 1 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Default Clear Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode vite 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 1 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Devi f Y M L B T T D W Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR ee Cert R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register Pe emer eee Er RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or
107. Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 10 9 10 9 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX Y Execute perational Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write vw o 18 Execute Same asprevset AX gt 18 ame asprev set w R R 1 5 18 Same as prev set v
108. ON To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page When performing When performing parameter setting with parameter setting with GX Developer dedicated instruction Set the parameters with the GX Developer see Section 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 1 When remote net ver 1 mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 3 1 and 6 3 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 3 2 and 6 3 4 2 When remote net ver 2 mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 4 1 and 6 4 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 4 2 and 6 4 4 3 When remote net additional mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 5 1 and 6 5 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 5 2 and 6 5 4 4 When remote I O net mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 6 1 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 6 2 Register the parameters to the PLC CPU Register PLC parameter program to the PLC CPU Y Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Set the PLC parameter with the GX Developer see Section 6 7 Create a program in which the RLPASET instruction is used see Section 6 7 Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Turn the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU to RUN 7 Check
109. QX41 of the master station is turned YO8 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT station Number 3 turns on Master station Q61P A1 Q06HCPU QU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Remote I O station station number 2 AJ65BTB1 16T 0000 Remote I O station station number 1 AJ65BTB1 16D 0000 OO Input module Output module Remote I O station station number 3 AJ65BTB1 16DT 0000 OO module 9 ae Terminal resistor 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example For more detailed information on remote device stations see the Remote Device Station User s Manual 10 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used 10 1 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with one connected remote I O station is used as an example Master Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QYA41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV LF L Remote device station station number 1 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station
110. RWwIE RWw00 Rwroo RWw01 RWrot RWw02 RWr02 RWwO03 RWr03 RWw04 RWwro4 RWw05 RWr05 RWw06 RWr06 1 1 RWwOD RWwOE RWrOE RWwOF t RWrOF RWw10 10 RWw11 iE RWw12 RWr12 RWw13 RWr13 RWw14 RWr14 RWw15 RWr15 RWw16 RWr16 1 1 1 RWw1D I RWHD RWw1E LE RWHE RWw1F Lf RWAF 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 1 Master station program Local station status confirmation X0 XOF Xi S80 0 o Hr M wc NO M100 s Ai NO M100 Control program Control program of station number 1 SW80 0 1000 27 X20 11000 Control program of station number 5 5180 4 X1080 511 0 Cnt X21 CY 1080 MGR NO 78 END 2 Local station program MELSEC Q Station number 1 is faulty Station number 5 is faulty Control program using data received from local station of station No 1 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 1 Control program using data received from local station of station No 5 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 5 a Ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 program Confirmation of data link status Xo XOF Xi o Hr M wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1000 18 X21 d b Ver 2 compatible local station station numb Conf
111. RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 to RX7FF to RX7FO Remote input RX when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJOBBT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name RX00 RX01 RX02 RX03 RX04 RX05 RX06 RX07 RX08 D75P2 ready complete Single axis start complete Dual axis start complete Use prohibited Single axis BUSY Dual axis BUSY Use prohibited Single axis positioning complete Dual axis positioning complete 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 Remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote output RY signals such PLC CPU Master station as positioning start RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY8F to RY80 to RY7FF to RY7FO Remote output RY when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal
112. Ready Q02H Host station Ovwte NUM 10 6 10 6 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 3 Initial setting of the remote device station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target to 1 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Uniti Target No of Target No of 1 1 D Begstprocedure 3 Reaistprocedue 2 Regstprcedue 10 Regist procedure 3 Regist pracedwe 11 Regist procedure Regist procedure 12 Regist procedure 5 Beastprcedue 3 Reaist procedure 6 Redist procedure 14 Reaistprocedure 7 Hegstprcedwe 5 Reaist procedure 8 J hegstprcedwe 16 Reaistprocedue Cancel Check End setup Clear b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 2 Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to A D conversion enable the first condition Set th
113. SB SW M FERON er 80040 to SBO1FF are read L J to SB0040 to SBO1FF FRON iig H640 m Kade SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Parameter setting M402 SB6E RB i M300 Instruct to set parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M300 _ 3H H mov KO 0 Clear complete status fmov K15 1 All setting data Valid mov 02 4 Number of connected modules involved in communication mov K3 D3 Number of retries 3 times mov D4 4 Number of automatic return modules 1 module 4 Operation specification when vov D5 CPU is down stop mov KO D6 4 Scan mode specification Asynchronous Mov KO D7 Dealay time setting 0 Slave station setting data 71 2101 010 1 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 mov H102 D11 Second Remote l O station occupies 1 station station number 2 mov H103 D12 1 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station Reserved station specification data station number 3 M300 89 mov H4 D50 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification data wH H2 60 Error invalid station specification station number 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 120 mov D70 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word m
114. Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode 4 54 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station f nctlonm aee teet testet des 4 55 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station setting function ssesseeeseeeenennenneneennenen 4 56 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchronous function 4 57 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function 4 61 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link 4 62 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function esessssssssseeeneeneee nennen 4 63 4 4 12 Multiple PLC system support etnies nnns 4 64 4 4 13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting 4 65 4 4 14 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 4 67 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions sssssssssssssssssssseseeeee nennen tnnt nnns etre nnns nnne 4 75 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions 4 75 OMEN SS UBI LUCR 5 1
115. Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed Section 4 4 10 Checks for the overlapping of number of occupied stations Station number overlap checking whether or not more than one module having a station number Section 4 4 11 setting of 0 exists in the system Allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any Multiple PLC system support CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via Section 4 4 12 AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs Allows the I O points of the remote I O stations to be selected Remote O station points setting from among 8 points 16 points and 32 points reducing the Section 4 4 13 number of reserved points Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased from 128 points for RX RY and 16 points for RWr RWw in the ver 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX RY and 128 points for RWr RWw in the ver 2 mode Cyclic points increase Section 4 4 14 4 Table 4 4 lists the functions for transient transmission Table 4 4 List of the functions for transient transmission Specifies a counterpart and communicates at an arbitrary timing Section 4 5 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Basic Functions This section explains the basic functions of the QJ61BT11N 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations Two types of communication modes are available for the CC Link system remote net mode and remote I O net mode 1 Remote net mode In
116. Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q n Setthe link scan interval using Delay information settings Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 Unit 50 u s Example Set to 10 500 s Setthe station data using Station information settings Default value Ver 1 Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Ver 1 Remote I O station Ver 1 Remote device station Ver 1 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Ver 2 Remote device station Ver 2 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Expanded cyclic setting When station type is ver 1 compatible station single cannot be changed When station type is ver 2 compatible station single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Remote station points When station type is ver 1 remote I O station 0 points reserve station 8 points 8points 8points reserved 16 points 32 points When station type is other than ver 1 remote station 0 points reserve station n points n Calculated automatically by GX Developer according to the number of occupied stations and expansion cyclic setting Refer to Section 3 1 for the number of points Re
117. This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 220 3X2 10 36 ms DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME _ MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n x 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 xX 2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3X3 10 39 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms
118. Y See Section 4 3 5 Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations 5 45 5 45 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link with the CC Link 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup The following explains the procedure from setting the parameters to starting the data link 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory The following explains the relationship between the CPU parameter area and the master station s parameter memory 1 CPU parameter area This area is used to set the basic values for controlling the PLC system and the network parameters that control the CC Link system 2 Master station parameter memory This area stores the network parameters for the CC Link system When the module is powered off or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters are erased PLC CPU Master station Parameter area Parameter memory Power ON CC Link system CPU reset CC Link system network network parameter area parameter area 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup The GX Developer is used to create the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters which are then written to the PLC C
119. ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 10 4 10 4 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank No Stop continue Scan mode setting Asynehrongus synchronous Asynchronous P synchronous Default Asynchronous 1 to 100 0 Not specified Delay information setting Default 0 Standby master station Expanded Remote Reserve invalid cyclic setting psum station points station select Station Intelligent buffer select word No Station type Receive Automatic Occupies 3 stations 96 points No setting Remote device station single b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lm Project Edit fiew Online Di Tools Window Help lal x sa ts fo e Bao pepe e a elele alale ale Program 4 ziz mal E Unset project of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program Device comment i 2 3 Em Par
120. b0 LINE ERROR Cable is disconnected the _____ TIME ERROR SWO0058 Detailed LED display 6584 status PRM ERROR gt M S ERROR y SW ERROR SMST c MT ERR gt RUN Operating as the standby master station Operating as the master station Error occurrence The module is operating normally Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 2 e T to SW0059 Transmission rate 6594 setting 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 3 8 Availability fe Available x Not available us bad niin Offline Master station Local station Forced master elec switching instruction 65D 9 result Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 0 Normal Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration SWOO5F jinitialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB 65Fu registration instruction result SW0060 M 660 ode setting status 2410067 Host station number 6614 SW0062 Module operating 662 status 81 0064 No of retries 664 information 51 0065 No of automatic 6654 return stations SW0069 4 Li 669 oading status SWO0066 Delay timer 66
121. be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRCV instruction is 10 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 2112 When the module specified by Un is not a special function module When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 3 Program example When M1 is turned ON this program reads 11 word data to D40 and succeeding addresses from buffer memory address 400 of the intelligent device station number 63 which is connected to the master module installed at numbers from X YOO to X Y1F The sett
122. by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The
123. cable length of 2m 6 56 ft or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent device stations Connection cable Terminal Terminal resistor Maximum length of main line not including the branch line length Distance between T branches 2 resistor 2 2 Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter R R R Indicates a remote I O station or a remote device station f Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 Switch Settings This section explains how to set the module switches 7 7 1 Station number setting The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station local station standby master station remote station and intelligent device station For details on the station number setting switches see Section 7 3 Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions 1 Specify sequential station numbers Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are connected For a module occupying two or more stations specify the first station number 2 Specify unique station numbers If duplicate station numbers are specified an installation error occurs Error codes are stored SWO0069 Setting exampl
124. check using a system configuration example 9 1 When Remote I O Net Mode is Used The remote I O net mode is used 9 1 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with three connected remote I O stations is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P N Terminal resistor Remote I O station station number 1 Remote I O station station number 2 Remote I O station station number AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTB1 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT 0000 0000 0000 O OO OO OO Input module Output module module Terminal resistor 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO x 10 Station number setting switch 0 x10 0 x1 Master station must be set to 00 x 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online MODE NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 CL DG 7 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote I O stations Settings of the remote I O station switches are shown below Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online Station nu
125. control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications CC Link System Master Local Module MODEL QJ61BT11N U SY E MODEL 13JR64 SH NA 080394E A 0305 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER 2 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
126. data link abnormal Turns off initialization procedure registration directive Turns on initialization procedure registration directive AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 54 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS OVP HOFC W1508 H30 W1509 SET Y1519 He tT Y1519 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting X151B 181 KS 500 1500 Digital value setting oye K1000 1501 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X151B 207 H 11500 Analog output enable 11501 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing X151A 2361 81000 0510 K2 w1008 D518 Error reset SET Y151A Y151A X151A 265 4 ME RST Y151A 268 MCR NO 269 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 55 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setti
127. dedicated cables Also attach the terminating resister which matches the kind of the cable Refer to section 7 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Table 3 2 Number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Remote I O RX RY 8192 points Remote register RWw 2048 points master station remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum No of link points per system station standby master station Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 30 points 30 points 62 points 126 points for local for local for local for local Station Station station station 16 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 1 station c 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points TA 8 t 16 t 32 t 64 points oints oints oints 2 stations P P P P erasi 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Occupies 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points 3 stations perae 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points ee 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 4 stations p p p 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points register RWr 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 The relationship between the transmission spee
128. device station RX This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X1X3 1 5 30 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X Remote device station proc
129. devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below series GX E SER Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Ein ac No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting B B rm Unset project amp 3 Program 5 2 Device comment 1 2 3 C uf Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parar Type Local station E 2 Remote pass Master station data link type m E B Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode I Device init All connect count Remote 1000 Remote output R Y 1000 Remote register wir wa Remote register Rw w 100 Ver 2 Remote input FX 1500 Ver 2 Remote output RY 1500 Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr w1000 Ver 2 Remote register Aww w1500 Special relay SB SBO Special registerSW sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select s i Scan mode isi Delay infomation settine Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting __ __Interrupt settings _ 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set
130. direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Description to RYOF RY10 Single axis positioning start Use prohibited 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device station Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw f Numeric data such as positioning start number b Signal direction Master module gt AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Address Description RWwO Single axis positioning start number RWw1 Single axis override RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 to The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each intelligent device station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master stat
131. error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO the module specified by Un is intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example When XO is turned ON this program stores 10 word data from DO to buffer memory address 100H and succeeding addresses of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO X0 SW80 0 0 MOVP Ki D101 MOVP H4 D102 MOVP H100 D103 MOVP K10 D104 GP RIWT U4 D100 DO MO App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 RIRCV instruction The RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and reads data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ra user File Direct function register register module Word Instruction Execu
132. for which the initial settings are to be performed Setting range 1 to 64 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Uniti Eo 3 2 Regstpocedue 9 Reaistprocedue CINE EN 3 Regist procedure 11 Regist procedure Regist procedure 12 __ Regist procedure 5 jBegstpcedue 13 Recist procedure e Resist procedure 14 Reaistprocedue 7 Regist procedure 15 Reaist procedure el Resist procedure 16 Reaistprocedue End setup Cancel b Setthe initialization procedure in Regist procedure 1 Input format Set the data input format for Write data in details of execution Setting range DEC HEX Default DEC 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Execute Flag Set whether or not to execute the specified initialization procedure Setting range Execute Only set use as a memo when the execution conditions are the same as when the execution flag is set as Execute but the content of execution is different Default Execute 3 Operational condition Specify whether new settings or the previous settings are used for the initialization conditions Setting range Set new Same as prev set Default Set new When Same as prev set is selected the processing is performed as follows Example RX1 0 RY3 Mov K15 RWw2 4 Executional condition settings Condition Device Set the
133. instruction at SB0001 standby master transferred to the standby master station 5E0n b1 switching OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stops the host data link However when the master station executes this the entire system Data link stop will stop OFF No stop instruction ON Stop instructed Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the 580003 when changing RLPASET instruction 0 parameters by the OFF Not instructed stop refreshing dedicated instruction ON Instructed start continue refreshing Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as 580004 Temporary error temporary error invalid stations 5E0n b4 invalid request OFF Not requested ON Requested Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by SW0003 SW0007 OFF Not requested ON Requested Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008 580008 SEOu b8 Line test request OFF Not requested ON Requested Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system SB0009 Parameter information configuration 0 b9 request OFF Normal ON Abnormal 580002 5 0 62 Temporary error invalid canceling request 580005 5 0 05 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 2 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description Offline Master statio
134. it returns to normal Automatic return function This function allows remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have been disconnected from the data link due to power off to automatically reconnect to the data link when they return to the normal status Setting method Set the Automatic reconnection station count value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error This function sets the data link status when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that stop the operation It is possible to continue the data link among the local stations 1 The data link continues when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that enables to continue the operation 2 Ifa standby master station is being set the data link will not continue when the master station PLC CPU is down even when the data link status at CPU down is set to Continue The standby master function overrides and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station Setting method Set the above data link status with the PLC down select value in the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6
135. loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match Is the corresponding local station performing data link Do the number of occupied stations settings for a local station match to the station information for a master station Is data written to the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station Is data read from the correct address of remote register RWr buffer memory of the local station e Check the LED display on the corresponding local station e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 e Check the max communication station number SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules SW0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO09B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B e Ch
136. master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Stop gt continue Scan mode setting Asynchronous synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous to 100 0 Not specified M Station Expanded Number of Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word No Station type cyclic setting occupied points station select stations Send Receive Automatic 1 Ver 1Intelligent device station single oe 128 points No setting 64 64 128 double SURE 128 b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below lm ct Edit Fi e View Online Diagnostics Tool 8 xl 10 e olele 8 gt b al gle 2 n sug miis SIE j 2c Ez 5 3l pe Es e e Poom zl ze al ep el zll mal x BA Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting Bs Program HF Device comment i 2 3 a Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational setine Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Master station E Eg 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x x ED Device memory Mode Remote net Additional m
137. memory Remote input Remote output RY Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Intelligent device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as initial data processing request and positioning complete Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as initial data processing complete and positioning start Remote register RWw Numeric data such as positioning start number and speed change value Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value and send speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of an intelligent device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as positioning complete PLC CPU Master station Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50
138. name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR p Devi Select f M L B D W R Remote register RWr evice name S rom B D W Ror Device name Select from M L B T C ST D Remote register RWw W RorZR Devi Select f X M L B D W R Ver 2 Remote input RX 2 FEIN Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST Ver 2 Remote output RY D W Ror ZR R r 1 0 SI D te regi Speci SB Device name Di from M L B D W R SB Ver 2 Remo giste Device name Select from M L B T C ST D RWw W Ror ZR al relay Devi Select f M L B D W SW Special register SW SORTIES Mad 9 Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B D W R or RWr Z 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 1 to 10 ibis Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank C Stop gt conti Automatic reconnection station count Standby master station No PLC down select Stop continue Stop gt continue Default Stop Scan mode setting Asynehrongusisynchronous Asynchronous P synchronous Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified aaa eae Default 0 a Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Delay information setting LSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting
139. of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 26 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 10 27 10 27 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER S
140. operation using the LED display master station e When data link is normal L RUN LED is lit When the data link is faulty L ERR LED is lit e Check the connection status of each module line test see Section 7 8 Check operation using the CC Link diagnosis see Section 13 4 Register the control program in the PLC CPU Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON System operation End 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 2 Installation The following section explains the precautions when handling the master and local modules from the time they are unpacked until they are installed For more details on the module installation see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 7 2 1 Handling precautions 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire burrs enter the module during wiring In the event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 The top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent foreign objects such as wire burrs from entering the module during wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the System be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ven
141. processing time ms 20 3 14 1 5 24 5 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20X1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote device sta
142. range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when configuring the entire system with Version 1 10 modules and cable is shown below r Local station or Local station or Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station intelligent device intelligent device or remote or remote 3 station station device station device station Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 1100 used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance e 2 I Hm 20cm or longer __ 9 8 DES EN dMWMps Ss ftom 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 CC Link Dedicated Cable Use the CC Link dedicated cable for the CC Link system If a cable other than the CC Link dedicated cable is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed If you have any questions regarding the CC Link dedicated cable or if you wish to see its specifications see the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org For details refer to the CC Link installation Guide issued by CC Link Partner Association 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC
143. read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory 3 Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and intelligent device stations 1 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations by cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with intelligent device stations positioning complete positioning start etc are communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Master station Network 1 parameters Automatic refresh parameters 3 lt Automatic refresh 4 Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh gt 9 Automatic refresh Network parameters Buffer
144. retro erre e gc e App 26 Appendix 2 7 RLPASET instruction cccceccecceseseeceececeeeeesecaeceeeeaeeaecaeeaeeaeeaecaesaeeeaesaeseseaseansaeseneeateaes App 29 Appendix Differences Between the New and Previous App 40 Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to 6 11 App 41 Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to 61 1 App 41 Appendix 6 Parameter Setting Checklist nennen App 42 Appendix 6 1 Parameter setting checklist sese App 42 Appendix 6 2 Station information setting checklist sse App 43 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction To conform this product to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive refer to the Section of CC Link Modules in Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU modu
145. scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 3 1 5 30 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple eae ey a ae dise 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 2 3 1 5 39 5 m
146. scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20 1 X 2 10 50 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw local station RWr This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 220 3X 1X3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyc
147. sent when a B604 Line test in processing line test was in progress Transient storage buffer could Transient storage buffer could not be B605 not be obtained obtained Table 13 1 Error code list 5 6 Parameter change was executed during transient request A response from the requested station was not returned within the watchdog time period A transient request was made to a remote I O station or a remote device station The receive buffer size of the dedicated instruction is less than the response data size The number of read write points in the control data of the dedicated instruction is outside the setting range The station number in the control data of the dedicated instruction is outside the setting range Multiple dedicated instructions were executed for the same station The setting of the interlock signal storage device of the RIRCV or RISEND instruction is outside the setting range An unsupported request was received There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station Corrective action Change the parameter after all transient requests are completed or before any are requested Set a longer watchdog time If an error persists check the requested module and cables Set the corresponding station to a local station or an intelligent device station Check the receive buffer size Change the number
148. sequence scan 1 Synchronous mode Performs data linking using the scan that is synchronized with the sequence program The sequence scan and link scan start at the same time In the synchronous mode the link scan interval becomes longer when the sequence scan takes long because the link scan is synchronized with the sequence scan IMPORTANT While in the synchronous mode the sequence scan time must not exceed the time specified for the corresponding transmission rate as listed below If the scan time exceeds the specified time a time out error occurs at each station Transmission rate Sequence scan time 10 Mbps 5 Mbps 2 5 Mbps 625 Mbps 156 Mbps 1 The asynchronous mode is recommended for a mixed system of local stations A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 when the QJ61BT11N is used as the master station When using the synchronous mode make sure to observe the restrictions in 2 and 3 below When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations set the sequence scan time of the local station CPU to be shorter than ST For more details on ST see Section 5 1 When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations use XnC as an interlock of the FROM TO instructions on the local station CPU side When operating in the sync
149. station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20X1 X1 41 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS x 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME e MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station RY remote I O station output This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote I O station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for t
150. stations Default value 64 modules Storage area 1 to 64 modules Stores the number of retries when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Storage area 1 to 7 times Stores the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan Default value 1 module Storage area 1 to 10 modules Stores the station number of the standby master station Default value 0 no standby master station specified Storage area 0 to 64 0 No standby master station specified Stores the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value 0 Stop Storage area 0 Stop 1 Continue Stores either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan Default value 0 Asynchronous Storage area 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous Stores the link scan interval Unit 50 s Default value 0 0 Not specified Storage area 0 to 100 0 Not specified Stores the reserved station Default value 0 Not specified Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on Stores the error invalid station Default value 0 Not specified Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Parameter Information Area List 2 3 Stores the setting status of the types of the connected remote local intelligent device and standby master stations
151. stations Remote I O net mode Remote net mode 0 61 ms 1 2 ms 1 61 ms 2 3 ms 2 94 ms 3 8 ms Transmission rate at 10 Mbps Setting method Set the remote I O net mode in Mode of the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that are not actually connected but to be connected in the future from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode the points of the stations set as reserved stations can be set to 0 points For parameter setting use GX Developer of version 8 03D or later This function cannot be executed if the dedicated instruction is used for parameter setting However this function can be executed when read write from to the reserved stations is not performed at cyclic data refresh using the FROM TO instruction Station that will be connected in the future Reserved station Station number Master Local station station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 8 Station number 10 Remote station Remote station EE station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station EE 2 stations 25 1 station
152. that are connected to the master station including reserved stations Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Sets the number of retries when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Specifies the station number of the standby master station Section 4 4 14 Section Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Section Setting range Stop Continue Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan Default value Asynchronous Section Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Sets the link scan interval Unit 50 s Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 0 Not specified Specifies the reserved station Default value Not specified Section Setting range Not specified 4 4 6 Specified Specifies the error invalid station Default value Not specified Section Setting range Not specified 4 4 7 Specified x Number of exclusive stations on the screen is described as Number of occupied stations in this manual Exclusive station 1 on the screen is described as Occupies 1 station in this manual 6 3 6 3
153. the ERR LED of the standby master station flashes This is because the station number of the standby master station will change from the one set with a parameter to 0 and the standby station becomes nonexistent Data link itself is performed normally To avoid this situation set the standby master station to be an error invalid station i The number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence program among the data sent from the station operating as the master station to the station operating as the standby station may differ according to the system used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Link special relays registers SB and SW relating to the standby master function The following explains the link special relays and registers relating to the standby master function These are stored in the buffer memory When the standby master station is controlling the data link its applicability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station its applicability is identical to that of the local station a Link special relays SB The link special relays SB relating to the standby master function are as follows The figures in parentheses the number column indicate buffer memory addresses and bit locations Example When the buffer memory address is 5EOH and the bit location is 0 5E0n 60 Table 4 5 List of link special relays relating to the stand
154. the CC Link list Eind e View Online Di Tools Window Help 12 xj ar e i 1 ose eve pelo t ax ae pelt S sess om Est n ese Hed e Eod Io sz me mee sm xs sue Fl xl AIRIS 2 4 e J Bal x 7 afe ara oF 9 gez S lE mal Fo Gm 4 Remote output RY Remote register Riwir Remote registe Fi ww Ver 2 Remote input FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote registei E Wr Ver 2 Remote register E Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial _Interrupt setting 5 B Unset project No of boards in module 1 gt Boards Blank no setting m Program HF Device comment 1i 2 3 E w Parameter Start 170 No 0000 19 paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network Master station v L7 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start X E Device memory Mode Remote 1 0 net mode x m I Device init All connect count 3 Remote Stop Asynchronous
155. the function version of the QJ61BT11N a Checking the SERIAL column of the rating plate on the module side CCrink WA MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No first 5 digits Function version SERIAL 05032000000000 80M1 IND CONT EQ 0 LISTED C A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN b See Section 13 4 for how to check the function version with GX Developer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SYS CONFIGU O MELSEC Q 2 2 4 CC Link version There are two types of CC Link version i e Ver 1 and Ver 2 1 Definition of Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 Version 1 10 modules have a uniform station to station cable length of 20 cm or more by improving the restrictions on the conventional station to station cable length In contrast the conventional modules are defined as Version 1 00 See Section 3 1 2 for the maximum overall cable distance of Version 1 10 In order to make the station to station cable length uniformly 20 cm or more the following conditions are required 1 All the modules that configure the CC Link system must be compatible with Ver 1 10 2 All the data link cables must be CC Link dedicated cables conforming to Version 1 10 The specifications for Version 1 00 should be used for the maximum cable overall distance and station to station cable length if a system contains modules and cables of both Version 1 00 and Version 1 10 See Section 3 1 1 for the maximum overall cable distance and station to
156. the other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for a data link error The station number setting of the station where a data link error has occurred may be wrong 2 Station number 0 station overlap checking Checks whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system 1 When duplicating the ERR LED lights up an error code is stored in SWOO6A switch setting status SBOO6A switch setting status turns on 2 Bycorrecting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link the ERR LED is turned off and the data in SWOO6A can be cleared 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 12 Multiple PLC system support This function allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs This is illustrated by the following example It is possible to monitor CPUA of the local station from peripheral device A connected to the AJ65BT G4 S3 and read the programs of CPU2 of the master station from peripheral device B connected to CPUS of the local station This function cannot be used with function version A Master station Peripheral device A AJ65BT G4 S3 Reading of programs Terminal resistor Peripheral device B Access source CPUs must be control PLCs in order to make an access 4 FUNCTION 22 MELSEC Q 4 4 13 Reducin
157. the total size of the buffer communication buffer is within 1000 4096 word Automatic update buffer 0 word no setting or 80 128 word to 1000 4096 word Note that the total size of the automatic update buffers is within 1000 4096 word Stores the station numbers of the remote I O stations set as 8 8 point remote points the remote I O station points setting lt 1 2 DO to D3 208 to 211 j P p i station setting Default value 0 no setting Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on 1 Used in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode x2 When the setting is 8 points 8 points reserved the station numbers are stored into both the 8 point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting 80H Send buffer 81H Receive buffer 82u Automatic update buffer 128 Send buffer 129 Receive buffer 130 Automatic update buffer 1ueBijeiu 194 eu L 184 Allocation of communication buffer and automatic update to to buffer CCx Receive buffer CDu Automatic update buffer 203 Send buffer 204 Receive buffer 205 Automatic update buffer ui9z SUL 419Z SUL 1 8 9 8 9 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Parameter Information Area List 3 3 D4 to D7 212 to 215 St
158. this mode it is possible to communicate with all stations remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Thus various systems can be configured according to their applications 2 Remote I O net mode In this mode a high speed cyclic transmission is performed for a system consisting only of the master station and remote I O stations Because of this the link scan time can be shortened when compared to the remote net mode The following provides an overview of the communication between the master station and a remote I O station using the remote I O net mode In the communication with the remote I O station the on off data of the switches and indicator lamps are communicated through remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Network Network parameters parameters Automatic refresh parameters Buffer memory 3 Krm refresh dod 2 5 4 Automatic refresh gt E EA Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote input 2 The input status of a remote I O station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status sto
159. time The following describes the method for calculating the normal value and maximum value for the remote net mode or remote I O net mode Link scan time LS 1 For remote net mode LS BT 27 NI X 4 8 NW X 9 6 X 30 ni X 4 8 nw X 9 6 ST EX F TR us BT Constant transmission rate Br 0 325 NI The final station number in a b and c It includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 a Total number of occupied stations for remote I O stations b Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations c Total number of occupied stations for local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations NW The final station number in b and c Includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 nw e os 2 s ao e s e Number of connected stations excluding reserved stations x a b c excluding reserved stations nw b c excluding reserved stations ST Constant A Last station number of remote I O stations B Last station number of remote device stations including the number of occupied stations C Last station number of local standby master and intelligent device stations including the number of occupied stations The largest value found in 1 to 3 below However 2 is disregarded when B 0 and 3 is disregarded when C 0 1 800
160. time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 3 2 15 27 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 2 Master station remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX remote device station RX This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number ROCESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value
161. to meet a wide range of user needs Master station PLC CPU o Remote I O station mr b Remote device station PV adi GE POOL rA Me TEP zi 1 Device manufactured by one of our Local station Intelligent device station PLC CPU CoA Master station The station that controls the data link system Remote I O station The remote station that handles bit unit data only Remote device station The remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only Local station The station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Intelligent device station The station that can perform transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Compatibility with CC Link This product supports following CC Link functions and performance Cyclic transmission Increase of cyclic transmission data size Transient transmission Less restrictions on the station to station cable length 1 3 Features The features of the CC Link are described below 1 Remote I O station communication The ON OFF status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY see Section 4 2 1 PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Automatic refresh Link scan X Remote input in
162. v Exclusive station 1 32 points w No setting 2 2 Remote device station v single Exclusive station 2 64 points w No setting 3 4 Intelligent device station single Exclusive station 4 v 128 points w No setting 4 8 Remote 1 0 station 59 Intelligent device station 64 64 128 single Exclusive station 1 32 points Reserve station single v Exclusive station 4 128 points v No setting KIKIKIKIK 64 64 128 v Default End Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station Intelligent device sta Send buffer First module station Intelligent device sta Receive buffer number 4 tion number 4 ion Send buffer Intelligent device sta Receive buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device stati Second module station number 9 ion First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link l
163. wiring status between the remote I O and external devices Example of wiring check Specify the Remote input RX for the master station to X1000 and the Remote output RY to Y1000 with the GX Developer Master station Remote I O station Remote station Station number 1 number Station number 2 number of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 AJ65BTB1 16D Input module AJ65BTB1 16T Output module a Checking the wiring between the input module and an external device 1 Turn ON the switch corresponding to the external device X0 which is connected to the input module of station number 1 2 Using GX Developer set X1000 in the Device field by choosing Online Monitor Device batch and then click on Start monitor 3 If X1000 is ON the connection between the input module and external device has been properly performed b Checking the wiring between the output module and an external device 1 Using the GX Developer set Y1000 in the Device field for the Bit device by choosing Online Debug Device test and then click on FORCE ON 2 If the connection between the output module and external device is properly performed the indicator lamp corresponding to the external device YOO is lit If X corresponding to the switch does not turn on or the lamp corresponding to Y does not turn on confirm the slave station offset size information buff
164. 006D SWO00B4 to SW00B7 of SB SWO06E SWOO0B8 SWOO06F SWOOB9 SWo070 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 5 Mode Selection Method Four different modes are available for CC Link to be applicable to various systems The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection Yes Do you use CC Link for the first time Are modules to be connected only remote I O stations Does the system completely utilize the previous system Is the previous system in the remote I O net Are modules to be connected only local stations Select the remote net Select the remote I O ver 1 mode net mode Are the numbers of points used per station 32 points for RX RY and 4 points for RWw RWr without any problem Is a ver 2 compatible station added to the previous system Select the remote net ver 1 mode Do the modules to be connected include a ver 2 compatible station Are the sequence programs for ver 1 stations utilized Will a ver 2 compatible station be connected in the future Select the remote net ver 1 mode Select the remote net ver 2 mode 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation
165. 098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote device station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 3 13 3 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously device station Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote register RWr buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters e Check the sequence program Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max
166. 1000 1000 B0 SWOI Indispensable setngs setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Project Ready 0 Host station I wwe 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refre
167. 11 A1SJ61BT11 1 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 i a CC Link dedicated cable QJ61BT11N Terminal resistor required E 2 Eu PEE CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor required i 26 42 Maximum 64 1 7 A A N A SN Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I O station 0 N 1 0 000 R RS 232C Analog digital Remote I O module converter module AJ65BTB1 16D i Interface module AJ65BT R2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65BTC 32D AJ65VBTCU 68ADIN i Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Applicable System Applicable PLC CPUs and notes on the system configuration are described below 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted The CPU modules and network modules for remote I O station to which the QJ61BT11N can be installed and number of modules that can be installed are listed in the table below a When performing the parameter setting with the GX Developer Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted QO00JCPU QOOCPU Maximum 2 Q01CPU Q02CPU It can be CPU Q02HCPU mounted only module QO6HCPU Maximum 4 with the Q Q12HCPU mode Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Network QJ72LP25 25 Maximum 4 module QJ72BH15 When perfo
168. 16 b4 X 32 b8 64 Condition 3 ub ivt v Belt The number of ver 2 compatible stations that c X 12 c2 5 24 4 X 48 c8 X 96 occupy 1 station which are set to Quadruple d X 16 d2 X 32 d4 X 64 d8 X 128 lt 2048 p4 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Octuple A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 Condition 4 116 X A 54 X B 88 C lt 2304 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 1 module for each system 26 n 1 1 Master station Local station Local station Local station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT
169. 18 Same asprev set v z 3 10 10 10 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0 and bit 13 BEOH b13 Table 10 1 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Berhol device station the initialization procedure registration 580000 While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and 5E0n b13 initialieation procedure remote registers stops Qik di 5 registration instruction s OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOOSE Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure SE5u b14 device station initialization DFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SE device station initialization procedureexeoution x x 5E0n b15 proe OFF Not complete i ON Complete Remote davies station S
170. 2 mode or remote net additional mode Intelli Local station intelligent device station and standby master station Remote I O station Device Remote device station Number of occupied stations Displays the number of occupied stations Status Displays the link status of the module Transient error Displays whether or not an error occurred during transient transmission Error occurred Error did not occur Expanded cyclic setting Displays the expanded cyclic setting Remote station points Displays the numbers of remote input and output RX RY points of the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations Not displayed in the remote net ver 1 mode When making temporary error invalid station setting do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0u 603H to 607H 13 18 13 18 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Loop test Checks the operating status of the connected remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station Normal stations are displayed blue abnormal stations red reserved stations green error invalid stations yellow and unused stations gray a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 Select CC Link for Module Setting 2 Specify the target master module of loop test for Module No or I O Address 3 Click the button 4 Click the Loop Test button 5 Whe
171. 28 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 7 RLPASET instruction Set the network parameter to the master station and start up the data link Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special indes GOnSant onstan Set data Er user File Direct function register register Instruction Execution symbol condition Command RLPASET Command RLPASET GPRPASsE Un 91 52 93 84 S5 D Master station set data Setting range Data type prem im number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stared specified device Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is Within the range of the stored specified device Start number of the device in which reserved station Within the range of the Device name specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which error invalid station Within the range of the specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which send receive and Within the range of the automatic refresh buffer assignment data is stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of m Within the range of the reading s specified device D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program canno
172. 3 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN Controlling data link I MST SMST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR O O LERR b LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on o otf Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed uM eds normally RUN LRUN MST O O SMST SD RO Sending data ERR LERR 11 44 11 44 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 1 turns on 2 When X21 of the local station of station No 1 is turned on Y40 of the master station turns on 3 When X21 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station
173. 4 16 7479 510145 32 15 14 swo14e 48 47 46 Indicates in which mode the system is operating SW0148 Parameter rode 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 748v 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode Indicates in which mode the host is operating 510149 Host parameter iode 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 749v 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode 7 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q The timing when the data in a link special register SW is updated differs depending on the link register number Table 8 7 lists the update timings of link special registers Table 8 7 Update timing of the link special registers Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing i swoo4t SW0071 Updated independently regardless Updated independently regardless of SB of SB Update after each station is SW0045 SW0072 E stabilized SWO0060 When SB0060 changes SW0074 to SW0077 When SB0074 changes SW0061 When SB0061 changes SW0078 to SWO07B SB0075 changes SW0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When SB0080 changes Updated independently regardless SW0067 SW0088 to SWO08B E P use SW0068 SW0090 When SB0090 changes SWO0069 Updated independently regardless _SW0098 to SW009B SWO006A of SB SW009C to SWOO9F Updated independently regardless SW
174. 4 339 K100 K100 KO D170 SET D170 D171 D172 M304 M303 SB3 M310 Start of the control program M310 XOF N305 Performs abnormal completion processing 362 ME Mc NO 320 NO 4320 Refresh of SB6E l 380 MW FROM HO HOEO K4X1000 K6 Refresh of RWr SB6E 396 FROM HO 2 0 D1000 K4 Station number 1 control program 51180 0 7 413 Station number 1 control program Station number 2 control program Sw80 1 427 Station number 2 control program i Station number 3 control program 80 2 441 Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E 455 0 T0 HO HIEO D2000 K4 J Refresh of RY SB6E 472 K4Y1000 K6 488 MCR NO Refresh of SB SW SM400 d 489 TO HO H5EO K4SBO K4 J TO HO H600 SWO K64 1 2 0150 0160 are dummy devices MELSEC Q First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word Dedicated instruction RLPASET 2 Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F RXr0 to RWr3 are read to D1000 to D1003 D2000 to D2003 a
175. 42 41 40 5E5n 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 5E6n 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 5 7 7 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 5E8H 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 5 9 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 5 AD AC AB AA A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 AO 5EBu BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO 5ECu CF CE CD C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 2 1 5EDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 5 9 E8 E7 E6 ES E4 E3 E2 E1 EO 5EF FF FE FD FB FA F9 FB F7 F6 F5 F4 F2 FO 0 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 SF1H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 5F2u 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 18F 13E 18D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 184 133 132 131 130 5F4u 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 5F5H 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 5F64 16F 16 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 5F7u 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B
176. 441 Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E 455 0 HO HIEO D2000 K4 J Refresh of RY SB6E 472 K4Y1000 K6 488 MCR NO Refresh of SB SW SM400 489 TO HO 5 0 K4SBO K4 TO HO H600 SWO K64 2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices App 39 MELSEC Q First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word Dedicated instruction RLPASET 2 Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F RXr0 to RWr3 are read to D1000 to D1003 D2000 to D2003 are written into RWw0 to RWw3 Y1000 to Y105F are written into RYO00 to RY5F SB0000 to SBOO3F are refreshed SW0000 to SWO003F are refreshed App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models The following lists the differences between the QJ61BT11N and older models QUetBTHN QJ61BT11 A 1S J61BT11 1S J61QBT11 Startup using the Startup using the parameters of the parameters of the Startup using Yn6 Yn8 Startup using Yn6 Yn8 Startup procedure master station CPU master station CPU and dedicated and master station CPU Yn6 and Yn8 canno
177. 5 2 Transmission Delay cereais nennen nennen trennen tnnt ennt enr tnnt ens 5 4 5 2 1 Master station remote VO station ener nnne nnns 5 4 5 2 2 Master station lt remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave 5 7 5 2 3 Master station lt remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 5 12 5 2 4 Master station lt local station Ver 1 compatible slave station 5 20 5 2 5 Master station lt local station Ver 2 compatible slave 5 26 5 2 6 Master station lt intelligent device station ssssseenenenennnne nene 5 34 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeenatenas 5 35 5 3 1 Master station local station entren rere et eren ao e eta 5 35 5 3 2 Local station lt local station sesssssssssssssssssssesseseenenee nnne nnns ntn t nnns 5 38 5 3 3 Master station intelligent device station esssssssssseeeeeeeneennen 5 39 A 7 A 7 5 4 Link Refresh Time eene vada Sue Patel vita 5 40 5 4 1 Master station local station ssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeenne nnne nnne nnne tnnt nnns 5 40 5 5 Stati
178. 540 V155D to Y1550 11 41 RYO6F to RYO60 RYO7F to RYO70 RYO8F to RY080 RYO9F to RYO90 RYOAF to RYOAO RYOBF to RYOBO Ver 1compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations o ojo olo o o o o ol ojojo o o o Local station PLC CPU Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 1070 to Y107 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 107D to x107 Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Ver 1 compatible buffer memor o RY000 o RY010 o RY020 o RY030 o RY040 o RY050 o RY060 o RY070 o RX000 o RX010 o RX020 o RX030 o RX040 o RX050 o RX060 o RX070 Ver 2 compatible buffer memory _ RYO6F to RY060 RYO7F to RYO70 RYO8F to RY080 RYO9F to RYO90 RYOAF to RYOAO RYOBF to RYOBO J RXO6F to RX060 RXO7F to RX070 RX08F to RX080 RXO9F to RX090 RXOAF to RXOAO to Local station PLC CPU Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 F070 to X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to 1060 K107D to x1070 o Y1500 o Y1510 o Y1520 o Y1530 o Y1540 o X1500
179. 64 information 0087 Parameter information 6674 S068 Host parameter status 668 p Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the mode setting status 0 Online with automatic return 2 Offline 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station Stores the operation setting status of the module b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 0 to 0 0 0 0 Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function invalid 1 Master station duplex function valid Input status from the data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 00 Occupies 1 station 10 Occupies 2 stations 11 Occupies 3 stations 01 Occupies 4 stations Master station local station start by dedicated instruction 0 Start by CPU parameter 1 Start by dedicated instruction Slave station refresh compulsory Clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily 1 Expanded cyclic setting 00 single 01 double 10 quadruple 11 octuple Indicates the retry count setting information when there is an error response 1 to 7 times Indicates the setting information for the number of automatic return stations during one link scan 1 to 10 stations Indi
180. 7 X10 to X1F X00 to XOF Data in the shaded areas in the master station is either input or retained according to the Operational settings in the network parameters 4 37 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting method Perform the setting using the GX Developer a Setting the master station First set Type in the network parameters MELSEC Q Master station that was down returns to system operation Master station Duplex function Master station that was down does not return to system operation Master station Next set the Standby master station No of the network parameter Setting range 1 to 64 blank means no specification for standby master station Default blank no specification for standby master station 1 Start 1 0 No i perational setting Operational settings Type Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode k All connect count 3 Remote inputFiX Remote output AY 1000 Remote register Rwr wo Remote register E Ww Ver 2 Remote input RX ee Ver 2 Remote output RY uet t Ver 2 Remote register Awr pE Yer 2 Remote register E Ww _ Special relay SB 5B Special register S W Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No 1 PLC down select Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt setti
181. 8 to 28B 28C to 28F 290H to 293H 294 to 297H 298H to 29BH 29C to 29F 2 0 to 2A3 2 4 to 2A7H 2A8H to 2AB 2 to 2AF Station number Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2B3H 2 4 to 2B7H 2 8 to 2BBH 2BCu to 2BFH 2C0H to 2C3H 2C4H to 2C7H 2C8H to 2CBH 2CCH to 2CFH 2DO0nu to 2D3H 204 to 2D7H 208 to 2DBH 2DCH to 2DFH 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Slave station offset size information In the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode the assignment of RX RY RWw RWr for the station numbers varies according to the expanded cyclic setting and remote I O station points setting a Offset Stores the head buffer memory address of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station When 2 or more stations are occupied values are stored into only the head buffer memory address of the station number When station No 1 occupies 2 stations values are stored into the RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 1 and the RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 2 remains default b Size Stores the size of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station in word unit When the size is less than 1 word it is rounded up and 1 is stored When the remote I O station points setting is 8 points 1 is stored Refer to Section 4 4 13 for the remote I O station points setting method For the reserved station OOOOH is stored Table 8 4 Correspondence between Station Numbers and RX RY RWw RWr Offset Size B
182. 9H 16 to 16BH 7 16CH to 16Du 16 to 16FH 170 to 171H 172 to 173H 174 to 175 176H to 177H 178 to 179H 10 11 12 13 Station Buffer memory address 0 to E1H 2 to 4 5 to 7 E8H to 9 to EBH ECu to EDH EEn to EFH FOH to F1H 2 to 4 to F5u F6H to F7H F8u to F9u number 6 ew o MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 17 to 17BH 15 17Cu to 17DH 16 17Ex to 17FH 17 180H to 181H 18 182H to 183H 19 184u to 185H 20 186H to 187H 21 188 to 189H 22 18 to 18BH 23 18CH to 18DH 24 18 to 18FH 25 190H to 191H 26 192u to 193H Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 194 to 195 28 196 197 29 198 199 30 19 19 31 19 to 190 32 19 19 33 1A0H to 1A1H 34 1 2 to 1A3H 35 1 4 to 1A5H 36 1A6H to 1A7H 37 1 8 to 1A9H 38 1 to 1ABH 39 1ACu to 1ADu Station Buffer memory number address 40 1AEuto 1AFH 41 1 0 to 1B1H 42 1 2 to 1B3H 43 1 4 to 1 5 44 1B6H 1B7H 45 1 8 to 1B9H 46 1BAuto 1BBH 47 1BCuto 1BDH 48 1BEuto 1BFH 49 1 0 1C1H 50 1C2uto 1C3H 51 1 4 1 5 52 1C6uto 1
183. ATIONS 3 1to3 7 3 1 Performance Specifications ecccccceccecceseeeeceeceeeeseesecaeceeeaecaecaeseeeeaecaeceeseaeeaesaeeeesaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaees 3 1 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 3 3 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 3 5 2 3 6 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 75 APU IRUNCUONIEISE Sse be eet see cot bets bla set ntn t Lbs ones cee 4 1 4 2 Basic FUnCtlons ee eoe Me m e i e ee e ee e I e EM cg ee em 4 8 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaesaesreneeaes 4 8 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations sse 4 5 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations sesssssssssssssseseeeeeneennenen enne 4 10 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device 5 1 4 16 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer nennen nnne 4 22 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction esee 4 23 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability sess 4 25 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off T rlCtIOn i uce ei itr rere E ee ERE END ies 4 25 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data
184. BT11N is mounted on the remote I O station of MELSECNET H 1 Host monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of the host the station to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 Select CC Link for Module Setting 2 Specify the target module of Host monitoring for Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button CC Link 2 CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Link Scan Time CC Link Data Link Status tat Data inkng Module No Action Status Noma 0 P C yo Address Switching Status Master Staton Current Eon ms h Link Bridge Using Loop Ro E Statior 0 status Nomal CH 1 Line status Loo oTt bain Loop Type wist Single Bus Monitoring other station Stau Ds tart Mar b Monitoring items 1 Host station Indicates the type master station local station standby master station of the monitored station and the mode of CC Link For a local station the station number is also displayed Not displayed in the remote net ver 1 mode 2 Data link status Displays the data link status of the host 3 Action status Displays the operating status of the host 4 Switching status Displays wheth
185. CC Link System Master Local Module MITSUBISHI M Ser a s series Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEEC Q J qu67BT11N e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION 7 M l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions d DANGER resulting in death or severe injury i 1 1 A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage J Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTION 4 DANGER e See Chapter 5 of this manual for each station s operating status when there is a communication error in the data link e When performing the c
186. CPU Master module Intelligent device station Command Communication I enr commences Buffer memory when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic update buffer Device memory 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the master module specified by Un 2 Stores the data read after the device specified by D b The RIFR instruction reads data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station c The maximum points that can be read by the RIFR instruction are 4096 d The basic number of steps of the RIFR instruction is 9 steps e The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction 2112 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruc
187. D instruction is 10 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 21 App 21 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 2112 When the module specified by Un is not a special function module When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 3 Program example When M6 is turned ON this program writes one word data to D10 from buffer memory address 111H of the intelligent device station number 63 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y00 to X Y1F The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY4 completion device RX4 error code storage device RWr1 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO M6 SW83 E MOV D1 D2 Mov Hiii D3 Ki c D MOV D5 MOV H104 D6 Mv H D7 Mov Ki D10 GP RISEND DO D10 D5 M40 RST M6 M40 TOME bse Tone no
188. DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 4 Link Refresh Time This section indicates link refresh time increase of END processing time at the PLC CPU 5 4 1 Master station local station This section indicates the link refresh time of the master local station 1 Remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode Expression KM1 KM2 X RX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 aE ms aE KM3 X RX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 RX Points of the remote input RX refreshed by the master local station RY Points of the remote output RY refreshed by the master local station RWw Points of the remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station RWr Points of the remote register RWr refreshed by the master local station SB Points of the link special relay SB refreshed by the master local station SW Points of the link special register SW refreshed by the master local station aE File register R ZR transfer time on memory card only when file register is used KM1 Constant 1 Master station 0 83 Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q e W Constant When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit Eu occ om QO0CPU orcpu Cd 9 QO2CPU 0 48 0 32 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit ee 107
189. Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 2 to 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote O station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote input RX Remote output RY Address number 4000 Rx F te axo 1 0 X xo J AVF e RYO eo ber 40014 RX1F to RX 10 MES RY1F to RY10 4201 4002 RX2F to RX 20 EE MEE RY2F to RY20 42029 40034 to RX30 RY to RY30 42034 4004 RX 4F to RX 40 ME RY4F to RY40 42044 4005 RX5F to RX 50 ME MEE RY 5F to RY50 4205 4006 RX6F to RX 60 TEE RY6F to RY60 4206 Station 4007 RX 7F to RX 70 to RY70 4207 Station number 2 40084 RX8F
190. Device comment 1 2 3 sf Parameter Start 1 0 0000 g s PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Master station v 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start bd 8 Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode Bi Device init All connect count 2 Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wr wa Remote reqister RWw 100 Ver 2 Remote input FiX 1500 Ver 2 Remote outputfRY 1500 Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr w1000 Ver 2 Remote register Ww w1500 Special relay SB 5 0 Special register SW SWO Retry count Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i y Scan mode settinc Asynchronous X X Delay infomation settir 0 Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset s Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte NUM SCRL 10 44 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Initial setting of the remote device station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 10 45 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target station numbers to 1
191. EN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Tean Operational cee __ Default Clear Hold Cclear gt station setting settings Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh D STOP setting Default Refresh C Refresh Clears compulsorily Master saton Mater station Master station Riper function Master station Duplex function peed station Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line Remote I O net mode Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 2 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR PY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W
192. Error invalid station specification Default value Blank no standby master station specified Section Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified i B gt gt gt 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Table 6 1 Parameter setting items 2 2 Standb Reference Master Local y Setting item Description master section station station station Sets the type of the connected remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Default value Ver 1 remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 1 to Ver 1 remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 64 Setting range Station type Remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station Ver 1 Ver 2 single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 Station number 1 to 64 Specifies the assignments of buffer memory sizes during transient transmission to a local station a standby master station and an intelligent device station Default values Send buffer size 40H 64 word Receive buffer size 40H 64 word Assignments of Automatic update buffer size 80H 128 word communication Setting range Communication buffer size 0 word Not specified or 40 64 word to 10004 4096 word However the total communication buffer size must be 10004 4096 word or less Automatic updat
193. ION AND LOCAL STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example 11 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used 11 1 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with one connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P N Terminal resistor 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below D rs QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch Masterstaion 0 0 Local station 0 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD DB 4 ire CL DG 9 7 11 2 11 2 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 1 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the ma
194. In the communication with remote device stations the signals for handshaking with remote device stations initial data request flag error reset request flag etc are communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data averaging processing specification digital output value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Master station 3 Network parameters Sea utomatic refresh A 4 utomatic refresh ae 6 utomatic refresh 9 utomatic refresh i parare Buffer memory Remote input Remote output Remote register i B Remote register RWw Br Remote device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote register RWw Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values detected temperature value etc 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station a
195. LED display status is as shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 0n O Off 24 V DC is being supplied b D Module is normal s e The data link is being performed normally D 10 56 10 56 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 2 Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN and confirm that the voltages converted from digital to analog are output 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D500 D501 CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value 2 D A conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN D510 CH1 Digital value setting D511 CH2 Digital value setting Master station Y Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11 mn Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 57 10 57 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STAT
196. LESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 3 Error Codes Table 13 1 lists the error codes that are stored in the link special registers SW When the standby master station is operating as the master station the detectability is identical to that of the master station When the standby master is operating as a local station the detectability is identical to that of the local station Table 13 1 Error code list 1 6 Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station received B112 Transient data length error A line error has occurred Check the line x A line error has occurred or an Check the line or check the B113 Transient data ID error instantaneous power failure has occurred supply power and power supply atthe send station module of the send station B115 Link error A line error has occurred Check the line B116 Packet error A line error has occurred Check the line In the remote device station initialize procedure registration function the Do not turn the specification of the Forced termination of the specification of the remote device station remote device station initialize B120 remote device station initialize rocedure registration function initialize procedure registration was procedure registration off until all p 9 turned off before all procedures were procedures are completed completed Error at a station on which t
197. M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CP
198. M X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 e MELSEC Q 5 2 5 Master station lt local station Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX local station RY This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON OFF until the master station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time
199. MOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 26 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details
200. NO M100 NO M100 Control program Control program of station number 1 SW80 0 1000 27 140 X20 11000 Control program of station number 5 51180 4 X1500 57 Cnt X21 11500 MGR NO 78 END 2 Local station program MELSEC Q Station number 1 is faulty Station number 5 is faulty Control program using data received from local station of station No 1 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 1 Control program using data received from local station of station No 5 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 5 a Ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 program Confirmation of data link status Xo XOF Xi o Hr M wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1000 18 X21 d m 2 2 Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station b Ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 program Confirmation of data link status Xo XOF Xi o Hr M wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1500 18 X21 11 43 2 Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station 11 43 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11
201. ONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Setthe refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list all jal wills 11 Bg p Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting Program 9 2 Device comment 1 3 Gi s Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 4 PLC paramet Dperational seting 2 Remote pass Master station data link type El Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v E Device init All connect count Remote input RX 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote wa Remo
202. OP switch is set to STOP e Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the station number setting switch for the master local module to 0 Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR gt 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module When test is complete The L RUN LED lights up The MST LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOBA to B7 line test 1 result However since line test 1 is performed for 64 stations disregard the bit s for any unconnected stations For the standby master station the test result is stored into SBOOBA standby master station test result only When test is incomplete all stations are abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result End MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK Start Check items prior to executing line test 2 Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch
203. PU GX Developer Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters PLC CPU Master station CC Link system parameter area Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Parameter memory Network parameters When the PLC system is powered ON or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the data link is automatically started GX Developer PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters CC Link system parameter area parameters parameters Master station Parameter memory Network parameters 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup GX Developer is used to create the PLC parameters I O assignment setting and a sequence program containing the RLPASET instruction which are then written to the PLC CPU Turn the power supply to the PLC system on or reset the PLC CPU Stop and then run the PLC CPU to execute the sequence program The network parameters are set and the data link is started by the RLPASET instruction The RLPASET instruction is completed after the data GX Developer PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction GX Developer PLC parameter
204. Q MEMO 4 F UNCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of QJ61BT11N dividing them into four sections Basic Functions Functions for Improving System Reliability Handy Functions and Transient Transmission Functions 4 1 Function List 1 Table 4 1 lists the basic functions Table 4 1 List of the basic functions Communication with remote I O T talion Performs on off data communication with remote I O station Section 4 2 1 Communication with remote device Performs on off data and numeric data communication with Section 4 2 2 4 station remote device station ate Performs on off data and numeric data communication with local Communication with local station Section 4 2 3 ion Communication with intelligent Performs communication with intelligent device station cyclic Seating ection device station transmission and transient transmission Parameter setting with GX Sets the network parameter automatic refresh parameter with Section 4 2 5 ection Developer the GX Developer Parameter setting with dedicated 3 i Sets the network parameter with the RLPASET instruction Section 4 2 6 instruction 2 Table 4 2 lists the functions for improving system reliability Table 4 2 List of the functions for improving system reliability Disconnects the module that cannot continue the data link Slave station cut off function becaus
205. Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 Terminal resistor 11 13 11 13 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used 11 2 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with two connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU6e1BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Ver 1compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 14 11 14 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch Masterstaion 0 0 Local station 0 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 ire CL DG 9 7 11 15 11 15 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Setting the master station parameters Thi
206. RESET RESET L CLR gt 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR MST LED is flashing test in progress To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master local module and the CPU module When normal The PLC CPU ERR LED flashes to check the operation of the watchdog timer When abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes Replace the module since there is a hardware malfunction Check once again to see that the terminal resistor that comes with the module is connected between terminals DA and DB When the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to RUN and a hardware test is performed the system status become SP UNIT DOWN and the PLC CPU stops to check the operation of the watch dog timer function Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to STOP and then perform the hardware test 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cables This section explains how to connect the master module local modules standby master module remote modules and intelligent device modules with the CC Link dedicated cables 1 CC Link cables can be connected from any station number 2 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to each module at both en
207. Remote output 2 3 o Q o e 77 s D amp Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Ofr ine Default 64 input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR O RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W RorZR O ister RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorZR er2Remoteinput RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR O er 2 Remote output RY Devicename Selecfrom Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR S O L B D W E L B T C ST D W fhe er 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR pecial relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR pecial register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Default 3 Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified EE Default Blank Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Not spocifigg Eo App 42 App 42 er 2 Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Co gt lt Q o 5 c 5 gt gt c 3 E o A 2 2 o c o 2 o 2 8 Q SENE 3 o 26 E D o amp g E o Z o APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 2 Station information setting checklist Station informat
208. Remote reaisterfWw Special relay SB Special reaister SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLE down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial settin Interrupt setting inas Indispensable settings setting Aleadyset Setifiisneeded No setting Already set m 8 ki Ready 02H Host station NUM Stop E Asynchronous lt 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Number of ex a CC LinkM station 1 Y
209. ST 1 SD RD ERR LERR STATION NO X10 2 xi MODE 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 1 i LED display Verify the data link status with the LED ON OFF Off When a watchdog timer error occurs On All stations have a communication error Also lights up when the following errors occur Switch type setting is incorrect There are more than one master station on the same line There is an error in the parameter contents The data link monitoring timer was activated The cable is disconnected QJ61BT11N Or the transmission path is affected by noise RUN To check the source of the error see Section 13 4 MSI Or see Section 8 4 2 for details regarding SW0058 detailed ERR LED display status Flashing There is a communication error in a station MST Operating as a master station during data link control S MST On Operating as a standby master station during standby L RUN On Data link is being executed On Communication error host Flashing at fixed intervals The settings of switches 2 and 3 were changed while the power is on Flashing at inconsistent intervals The terminal resistor is not attached The module and CC Link dedicated cable are affected by noise so During data sending RD During data receiving Station number setting switches Set the module station number setting at the time of shipment 0 lt Setting
210. Set the start input output number for the intelligent function module for which the interrupt setting was performed Setting range 0 to OFFO H 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Start SI No on the intelli unit side Set the smallest number for intelligent function module interrupt pointers specified in Interrupt SI No of the Interrupt settings in the Network parameters Setting range 0 to 15 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting x PLC side s Intelli unit side Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer Start No No of units Start 1 0 No Start 51 No 0 TrITTTTTTITTITTI End setup Cancel 3 Simulation of the interrupt program When the event issuance conditions are established in the master station using the GX Developer the interrupt program is executed even when the corresponding modules are not connected and then the interrupt program can be simulated Example A case where an event is issued when RX01 turns and then an interrupt program is executed Remote device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station number of occupied stations 2 eee nese hee to 2 The event issuance 3 The interrupt conditions are program is established 1 Turns on RX01 executed using the GX Developer 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup By mounting the QJ61BT11N in the system configuration i
211. Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below d S MELSBEL series GX RAM Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program Device comment Parameter Start 1 0 No is PLC paramete Operational settin 2 Network 124 Remote pass Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 9 HB Operational settings Local station EL Device memory Device init connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register R wr Remote registe Fi ww Ver 2 Remote input FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register E Wr Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode settine Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial _Interrupt setting EI ___Interrupt settings 4 Indispen
212. Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 CL DG 7 10 2 10 2 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual MELEE AJe5VBTCU 68ADV CON A B gt ooo SEL g POWER R 2 3 Station number setting switch SW Transmission speed setting switch r a 4 OFF 5 B 2 110 v Station number 1 D lt 6 0 t Qa E L 4 7 Q zx gt 156kbps Isti Ol 8 Z iw J 4 5 Mode select switch 0 Nomal mode CON V J JP MITSUBISHI CCtin 10 3 10 3 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS
213. Start 1 0 No si PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Local station E Remote pass Master station data link type EL Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wr Remote registerF ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register R wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set s Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 36 11 36 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4
214. Station number 1 1 number 2 2 number 4 3 number 12 1 Master Local station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote I O station device station device station I O station DUNS FX QNO CN A 1 occupies 1 station 2 occupies 2 stations 3 occupies 4 stations quadruple single BT 0 8 ST 2300 EX 50 110 X 1 160 NI 12 16 1 800 12 X 15 980 NW 11 16 2 900 3 X 50 1050 N 5 3 1200 11 X 100 2300 ni 12 A 12 B 3 C 11 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 16 X 4 8 16 X 9 6 5 X 30 12 4 8 10 X 9 6 2300 160 2908 8 5 2 91 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 For remote I O net mode LS 27 NI X 4 8 N X 30 ni X 4 8 ST F u s BT Constant transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps gr ma a2 16 NI NI Final station number must be a multiple of 8 Loses lelsjsiss Number of connected modules i Total number of occupied stations ST Constant 250 ni X 10 F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 X BT X 1 number of retries Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station Station Station Station number 1 1 number 2 1 number 3 1 Ma
215. Station Station Station number 9 Master number 1 number 2 Local station number 8 Intelligent station Remote Remote occupies Reserved device station X Y00 to 1F station device station 4 stations station occupies occupies occupies occupies i 1 station 2 station 1station 4 stations pA 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings 7 MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lg Project Edit d Replace View Online Diagnostic oos Window 18 c 22 pt epo ER s ES S alle le sa ele zala GSES Program z z fe X 2 E B Unset project No of boards in module 1 7 Boards Blank no setting 482 Program ET Device comment ii 2 3 af Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 27 Network para Type Master station Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x S 8 Device memory lode Remote net Ver 1 mode X IK Device init All connect count 5 Remote inputf RX Remote outputfR Y Remote register wi Remote registerfiww
216. T O O SMST Sb RO Sending data ERR LERR 11 28 11 28 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 1 turns on 2 When X21 of the local station of station No 1 is turned on Y40 of the master station turns on 3 When X21 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 5 turns on 4 When X21 of the local station of station No 5 is turned on Y41 of the master station turns on Master Q61P A1 JQO6HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 41 QX41 X Bo ERU Ver Tcompatible local station ERE number 1 occupies 4 TTA Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QU6e1BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 Tren Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double X Terminal resistor 11 29 11 29 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used 11 3 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with two connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU6e1BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 Q
217. TATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN e am E 9 Controlling data link MST SMST SD 9 RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR LERR b LED display of the remote device station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 24 V DC is being supplied Module is normal The data link is being performed normally Ii 10 16 10 16 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D1500 CH1
218. TATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX m perational xecutional condition Details of execution E condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data 2 4 2120 Wy Woy X x z 4 Similarly make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 4 The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to Analog output enable the first condition Set the output range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set the HOLD CLEAR setting of channels 1 2 to CLEAR the third condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the forth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the sixth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the seventh condition Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 4 Input format HEX T Execute Operational Executional condition Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Wr
219. The H W SW Information displays the following information S MSTNo Station number of the standby master station set by parameter 0 No standby master station specification B RATE Setting of transmission speed MODE Mode setting status CONFIG SW62 module operation status 13 21 App APPENDIX MELSEC Q APPENDIX Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram This section describes the external dimensions of the QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N RUN STATION NO X10 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 Terminal block diagram with the cover open Unit mm inch App 1 App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List Transient transmission can be performed for the local stations and intelligent device stations using dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used for each of these stations Target station Reference page Reads data from the buffer memory or the Appendix 2 1 Master station PLC CPU device of the specified station Local station Writes data into the buffer memory or the PLC RIWT q E Appendix 2 2 CPU device of the specified station Reads data from the buffer memory of the 2 1 specified station Writes data into the buffer memory of the 3 RIWT N Appendix 2 2 A specified station pp A
220. U 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant Transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps gc s r 9 wm v SL 1 Example Target station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant L ge ji s e dp ee SL Target station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 x41 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 3 Master station lt intelligent devi
221. U has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 lm Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Window 218 x allta c malti t D TES EE Fe dea E e E E A osla S espe aaa 1 ale lel ziale sa is e Ep lalalala li Program zI A of Sl 12 1 mnl xl z Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program t IV Device comment i 2 3 Ei uf Parameter Stat 120 No 0000 W PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 15 Network parai Type Local station T E 5 Remote pass Master station data link type z i z I Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode E 18 Device init All connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf Ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEiX 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote reaister E wr Ver 2 Remote r
222. VERVIEW MELSEC Q 16 Error invalid station setting function By setting the network parameters the module that is powered off in the system configuration will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master station and local station However caution is required since errors are no longer detected see Section 4 4 7 Stations to be specified as error invalid stations Remote station occupies 2 stations Remote station occupies 1 station Station number 4 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations Station number 7 M Nu This station does not become a data link faulty station Station number 4 Station number 7 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations 1 10 17 Scan synchronous function This function synchronizes the link scan to the sequence scan see Section 4 4 8 18 Temporary error invalid station setting function With this function the module specified by the GX Developer will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master or local station while i
223. VP w8 D508 Reads error code RWr8 FSET Y101A 4 Turns on error reset 2 request flag RY1A Y101A X101A c 4 Turns off error reset 2811 11 4t LRST YI request flag RY1A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X107B i 4 CH 1 digital value 264 4 MOVP 500 Digital value setting RWwO 500 setting 2 hd K1000 91000 1 CH 2 digital value AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X107B setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog 290 Y1060 Output enable disable Analog output flag RYOO enable Turns on CH 2 analog 11061 2 output enable disable AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing flag RY01 X107A Read CH O check code 319 BMOVP 0510 K2 RWr0 RWr1 MOVP 14 D518 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset Turns on error reset SET Yi0A e li L J request flag RY1A Y107A X107A RST YIO7A 1 Turns off error reset request flag RY1A MCR NO y The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 31 10 31 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 2 4 Creating a program MELSEC Q This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The sh
224. WO00B RWr0B WO000B WO010C RWrOC WOO0C RWrOC WO00C WO010D RWr0D WOO0D RWrOD WOO0D WO10E RWr0E WOO0E RWr0E WO000E W010F RWr0F WOOOF J RWrOF WO00F 9006 DL E Ver2compalibe 0 er 2 compatible buffer memory buffer memory 1000 Rwr10 1 RWw10 W1500 1001 RWr11 RWw11 1501 W1002 RWr12 RWw12 W1502 W1003 RWr13 RWw13 W1503 W1004 RWri4 RWw14 W1504 W1005 RWrH5 RWw15 W1505 W1006 RWrie RWw16 W1506 W1007 Rwnu7 RWw17 W1507 W1008 RWr18 RWw18 W1508 w1009 RWH9 RWw19 W1509 W100A RWHA RWw1A W150A W100B RwriB RWw1B W150B W100C RWHC RWw1C W150C W100D RWHD RWw1D W150D W100E RWriE RWw1E W150E W100F RWw1F W150F 91500 RWwiO RWO W1000 W1501 RWwii RWr11 W1001 w1502 RWwi2 RWr12 W1002 W1503 RWwi3 RWr13 W1003 W1504 RWwi4 RWr14 W1004 W1505 RWw15 RWr15 W1005 W1506 RWw16 RWr16 W1006 W1507 RWw17 RWr17 W1007 W1508 RWwi8 l RWr18 W1008 W1509 RWw19 RWr19 W1009 W150A RWw1A RWriA W100A W150B RWwIB RWr1B W100B W150C RWwic RwriC W100C W150D RWwiD RWr1D W100D W150E RWWIE RWHE W100E W150F RWwiF RWr1F W100F 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 1 Master station program Local station status confirmation x0 XOF xi 0 E E wc
225. Y41P QX41 QY41P Eos local station Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 30 11 30 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch Masterstaion 0 0 Local station 0 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 ire CL DG 9 7 11 31 11 31 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Tean Operational cee __ Default Clear Hold Cclear gt station sett
226. a Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device Master station Address 1 0 For station J 1 1 1 1E2u 1 1 4 For station J 1 5 number 2 1 6 1 7 1 8 For station 1 9 number 3 1 1 1ECu For station 1EDu number 4 1 1 1F04 For station J 1 1 number 5 1F2u 1 to 2DCu For station 2DDu number 64 opp 2DFu Remote register RWw station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWr RWw 0 RWr 0 WR RWw1 RWr RWw2 Rwr2 o O RWw3 RWw 4 RWr 4 o 1 RWw5 RWw6 RWwr6 RWw7 Rwr7 RWw 8 RWr 8 Pew RWw9 RW9 RWwA RWrA a RWwB RWB RWw C RWr C RW D o d RWwE RWE 7 b RWwF RWw 10 RWr 10 RWwtt J jo do Rwwi2 RWr12 RWwi13 RWr13 to to RWw FC RWr FC RWwFD
227. a device station with When a Mord The GX Developer a communication communication error data link faulty y error power off etc s Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Continue Continue station is set local Retains the receive Y occurs in a remote station setting area from a remote device station device station with F ues communica a communication tion error error Clears the receive area from a local a Retains the station with a When UU receive area The GX Developer communication communication error data link faulty from a local ata link fau A j error power off etc ENS Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station with Continue station is set local Retains the receive occurs in a local t station setting area from a local i station communica station with a n tion error communication error 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer the data is clear when the RY refresh device is set to Y the data is cleared or held when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 2 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station the receive area is retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than
228. able connection visually or with a line 1 3 Are there any disconnected cables test e Check the line status SW0090 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system Connect the appropriate terminal resistors that match the cable type used for the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system See Section 7 5 CPU corrective action Unable to perform data link for the entire system the master station CPU of the master station Does the sequence scan time exceed the tolerance for each transmission rate when using the synchronous mode 50 ms Switch to the asynchronous mode or reduce the 50 ms transmission rate 100 ms 400 ms 800 ms Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system Are correct terminal resistors connected e Check the host parameter status SW0068 e Check the switch setting status SWO06A Has an error occurred at the master station e Check the Loading status SW0069 e Check to see if the ERR LED on the master station is flashing See Section 13 2 e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote l O station performing remote station data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter
229. ade x I Device init connect count 2 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote registerFi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registei E Wr Ver 2 Remote register E wW w Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i i Scan mode settin Asynchronous v X Delay infomation settinu 0 Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting _ 4 Indispensable settings setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set m Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte NUM SCRL 11 33 11 33 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Setthe r
230. aded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X107F to X1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 Remote device station Remote device station station number 1 station number 4 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y106F to Y1060 Y107F to Y1070 Y108F to Y1080 Y109F to Y1090 10 32 10 32 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Remote device station station number 1 Remote device station station number 4 PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN RWw0 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw1 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting RWw3 Average processing specification RWwA CH 1 average time number of times setting RWw5 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw 6 CH 3 average time number of times setting RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting RWw 8 CH 5 average time number of times setting
231. age processing i i Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 12 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 4 Creating a program This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY LC CPU ENERO Remote device station station number 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV X100F to X1000 SS to RXOO X102F to X1020 to X1030 Y100F to Y1000 mum RYo to RY0O Y101F to Y1010 i 4 RY1F to RY10 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 10 13 10 13 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Remote registers RWw and RWr eee ee Sa oad ecce Remote de
232. al supply power Remote I O module internal 5 V DC N Input Xn When the input external power supply turns OFF the input Xn turns OFF after the response time for the input module to change from ON to OFF 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q b Countermeasure for mis input For the power supply module the stabilized power supply and the input external supply power of AC input wire the power cables from the same power source PLC CPU Remote I O module Module power supply Input external supply power Power supply module Master module For DC input 41 Stabilized L power supply PLC CPU Master module Remote I O module 2 ne gt Q Q o 5 a For AC input M J Module power supply Input external supply power Stabilized power supply When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I O modules select the proper type of cable and perform the wiring in consideration of the voltage decline Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I O module is within the specified range of the remote I O module to be used Stabilized power supply Remote module Remote module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 3 How to check the function version The following describes how to check the function version 1 How to check
233. ameter Start 1 0 No 0000 si PLC paramete Operational settinc Operational settings 2 Network Master station E E Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start BI Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 5 Device init All connect count 1 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote registerFi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register E ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i i Scan mode settinc Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information Station information Remote device station initial Initial settinc setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set PLC parameter Q02H Host station Ovrwrte NUM 10 5 10 5 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Sett
234. an interrupt program according to factors such as the on off status of specified RX RY and SB devices and the match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data in order to allow the PLC CPU to execute the interrupt program Because the conditions for issuing the events are set using the GX Developer the number of program steps is reduced thus shortening the scan time Events can be issued for all stations A maximum of 16 event issuance conditions can be set 1 Event issuance conditions Events are issued under the following conditions On off status of specified RX RY and SB devices Match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data When the link scan is completed 2 Event issuance condition setting method a First set the Interrupt setting in the network parameters 1 Input format Set the data input format for Word device Setting range DEC HEX Default DEX 2 Device code Set the device to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range RX SB RY RWr SW Scan completed 3 Device No Set the device number to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range When RX or RY is selected 0 to 1FFF When SB or SW is selected 0 to 01FF H When RWr is selected 0 to O7FF 4 Detection method Set the detection method for the event issuance conditions Setting range Edge detect Issues event only at rise and fall Level detect Issues each link scan event when the event issu
235. ance conditions are established 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 Interrupt condition Set the conditions under which events are issued Setting range When RX SB or RY is selected ON OFF When RWr or SW is selected Equal Unequal 6 Word device Set the conditions under which events are issued when RWw or SW is selected Setting range 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal 7 Interrupt SI No Set the intelligent function module interrupt pointer number Sl is an interrupt pointer for an intelligent function module and not a device used in an actual program Setting range 0 to 15 Interrupt settings Unit 1 Input format DEC has Device Detection Interrupt Word Board Interrupt No method condition device E No SI No Rw DO004 Level detect v Unequal 50 LE M v v End setup Cancel 16 Clear POINT Only one event issuance condition can be set for each interrupt program b Set the PLC parameter PLC system Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer settings 1 Interrupt pointer start No on the PLC side Set the interrupt pointer start number for the CPU Setting range 50 to 255 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of event issuance conditions specified in the Interrupt settings of the Network parameters Setting range 1 to 16 3 Start I O No on the Intelli unit side
236. and 4 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Module 1 b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJE5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to A D conversion enable the first condition Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new
237. andby master station Fe the station number setting of iie standby master station No network specification error loading the local standby master x parameter of the master station or the status i station and then reset the PLC station set in the standby master station CPU of the local standby No network parameter of the master S master station station is a local station B39B Reserved station setting error All stations were set as reserved stations pisei reserved station Eco The station number designated for the Standby master station setting andby master station is specified to a error ation other than an intelligent device ation Reserved station 0 points setting has been made in the remote net additional Reserved station 0 points mode setting error Reserved station 0 points setting has Set the station of reserved 0 been made for the station that is not a points setting as a reserved reserved station station points in the remote net additional mode net ver 2 mode 8 16 points setting has been made for 8 points setting and 16 points 8 16 point remote I O station the station other than the remote I O setting have been made for the setting error station same remote I O station Make either 8 points setting or 16 points setting for the remote VO station In the remote net additional In the remote net additional mode the mode make network parameter maximum station number of ver 1
238. ansmission A 15 1 11 4 75 Transient transmission status 8 30 8 36 Transmission delay time 5 4 Transmission rate 3 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 7 6 Transmission rate and mode settings 7 14 Transmission rate setting 8 32 Ver 1 compatible slave station A 14 Ver 2 compatible slave station A 14 Ver 2 compatible remote input 8 22 Ver 2 compatible remote output 8 22 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWTr 8 24 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 8 24 Weight det erst tet etat utente 3 1 When a dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on 13 7 Wiring ENOK 7 10 Index 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis wa
239. ap station numbers Do the settings match Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link e Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the LED display on the corresponding remote l O station Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the max communication station number SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap s
240. arameter Start 1 0 No 0000 2 PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings Network Typ Master station E 19 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start ad 8 Device memory Mode Remote 120 net mode x v 18 Device init All connect count 3 Remote input Ei 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote registerfR wir Remote register EwW w Ver 2 Remote input Ei Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register R Wr Ver 2 Remote register RW w Special relay SB 5 0 Special register SW sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station intial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 4 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Alreadyset Project Ready Q02 H Host station Ovwwte NUM 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 3 Creating a program This section shows the program used to control the remote I O stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the PLC CPU and the inputs outputs of remote I O stations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used
241. are used per station 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored Two words are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote output RY Address YOF to YOO to Y10 For station 1604 RY F to RY 0 0 For station E1 number 1 number 1 1615 RY 1F to RY 10 E24 For station E34 number 2 For station J 162 number 2 1634 gt E4 For station E5u number 3 For station J 1641 number3 165 gt E64 For station 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For station J 166 E74 number4 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 1 1 FOr station MMOL number 4 1671 E84 For station E94 number 5 1 1 1 For station J 168 number5 1694 M 15C4 For station 15Du number 63 For station J 10 number 63 1DD gt 15E4 For station 15F number 64 For station 10 number 64 M 8 PROGRAMMING Station Buffer memory number address 1 160 to 161H 162 to 163H 164 to 165H 166 to 167H 168 to 16
242. aster station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote I O station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 Address Remote input RX Remote output RY Address 1 1 1 I For station f 0 RX F to ly EE XOF io X00 EN 160 For station number 1 Etu RX TF to AX 10 rod XIF to X10 161 numberi For station J 2 i i 1624 For station number 2 1634 number2 For station J 4 p i E 1644 For station number3 E5y bd MEME 1654 number3 For station E6x 1664 For station number 4 7 1674 number 4 1 i 4 i For station 8 1684 For station number 5 L E94 169 number5 to to i to For station f 15C4 RX7CF to RX7CO i 1DC For station number 63 1505 RX7DF to RX7DO pon ME 1DD4 number 63 For station 15EH RX7EF to AX7EO lt DE For station number 64 15 RX7FF to RX7FO 1 J number 64 1 1 I 1 1 8 PROGRAMMING St number St number 6 EA o 1 ation Buffer memory address EOH to E1H E2u to E3H 4 to 5 to 7 8 to 9 to EDH to FOH to F1H 2 to
243. aster station Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected due to a PLC CPU or power supply problem Slave station Generic term for remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Master local module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 Master module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBTI 1 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as master stations Local module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations Remote module Generic term for AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI and A852GOT Intelligent device module Module that can perform transient transmission such as the AJe5BT R2 including local module Remote I O net mode Dedicated mode for sending and receiving data to and from the remote I O station at high speed Remote net mode Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC Link remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station The remote net mode has three different modes remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Mode in which complete compatibilit
244. aster station lt intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station and an intelligent device station varies by the type of intelligent device station used See the User s Manual for the intelligent device module to be used 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions This indicates the dedicated instruction processing time the time from the moment an instruction is issued until a response is received 5 3 1 Master station lt local station 1 Master station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master station until a response from the local station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1x 1 067 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant ie SL x1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QOGHCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 20 545 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 4 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 X 1 067
245. ate buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction 2112 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When the setting for number of points to write n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 4100 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start I O number 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 3004 Automatic update buffer memory 5FFH When is turned ON the following example program writes 10 word data from DO to the automatic update buffer offset value starting from 100 400H of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO 0 SW80 0 0 0 Ki H100 DO K10 App 28 App
246. ation Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Of line 1 to 64 All modote Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Devi f Y M L B T T D W Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR i ee OEL Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name oo Y M L B T C ST D W Ver 2 Remote register T emer RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 11 22 11 22 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 __ Automatic reconnection R o station count Default 1 OoOo Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous TT Scan mode setting Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program De
247. ations not specified with the A bit other than that for station number 5 parameter was ON for a module occupies 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 The total size of the communication Set the total size of the buffers in the station information communication buffers to 4 k parameter exceeded 4 k words words or less The total size of the automatic update Set the total size of the buffer in the station information automatic update buffer to 4 k parameter exceeded 4 k words words or less Specify the standby master station to a value within the range from 1 to 64 B391 Retry count setting error The retry count parameter was set to a Set a value within the range x parameter value other than 1 to 7 from 1 to 7 Operation when CPU is down The operation when the CPU is down B392 NS Specification parameter was set to a Set or 1 x specified error parameter value other than O or 1 B393 Scan mode specification error The scan mode parameter was set to Set 0 or 1 parameter value other than O or 1 Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations us Set a value within the range B394 stations setting error parameter was set to a value other than n x A from 1 to 10 parameter 1to 10 B396 Station number overlap error A duplicate station number was specified Set so that station numbers are parameter with the station information parameter not duplicated The station informatio
248. automatic update buffer of the intelligent device station specified by the master station or the random access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored n Device specified device Number of points to write 0 to 4096 Binary 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to 0 Between 0 and parameter setting value 1 App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RITO instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Command G RITO Device memory Y update buffer Intelligent device station Communication commences Buffer memory when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic App 27 1 Accesses the device after the device specified by D of the master module specified by Un 2 Writes to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 The RITO instruction writes data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station The maximum points that can be read by the RITO instruction are 4096 The basic number of steps of the RITO instruction is 9 steps The automatic upd
249. ay SB 5 0 Special register S w 5 0 Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No D ERR i Delay infomation setti 0 Station information settin Stal Remote device station initial lntemuptseting _ m Indispensable settings No setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Ready Q02H Host station Ove SCRL 11 18 11 18 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Setting range Setting value Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Default Clear Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh Isoril Operational STOP setting Default Clear Refresh CRefresh_ gt Clears compulsorily settings Number of 9 Occupies 1 to 4 stations occupied Occupies 4 stations Default Occupies 1 station stations Expanded single double quadruple octuple ee cyclic setting Default single Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station
250. ay cause damage to the module Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installing is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module These may cause fires failure or malfunction e The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation e Use a dedicated cable as specified by the manufacturer for the CC Link system If a cable other than the one specified by the manufacturer is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed Also follow the specifications listed in Chapter 3 for the overall cable distance and th
251. by master function 1 2 SB0001 5E0u b1 SB000C 5 0 b12 SB0042 4 b2 SB0043 E44 b3 SB0046 E44 b6 SB005A 5 5 b10 SB005B 5E5H b11 SB005C 4 b12 Applicability Applicable x Not applicable Description Master Local station Offline station Gives refresh instruction for cyclic data after the data link control Refresh instruction at is transferred to the standby master station standby master switching 0 No instruction 1 Instructed Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that controls the data link to the master station that stands Forced master switching by in case the standby master station becomes faulty 0 No request 1 Requested Refresh instruction Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master acknowledgement status switching has been acknowledged or not at standby master 0 Not acknowledged switching 1 Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master Refresh instruction Switching is complete or complete status at standby master switchin yng complete 9 1 Switching complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBO00C signal Forced master switching can be executed or not executable status OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master station when it has received a
252. c ie rine t ses i orc tta Sore eed ree ieee esate A 1 REVISIONS fe teas inito tidie isn A 5 INTRODUCTIONS s ertt mre TI eot a Du ute mtd ot ted a a A 6 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction c ceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaees A 13 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations c ceccecesececeeseeseeseceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeeeeaneaes A 14 Product Components c cceccececeseeceeceeeeeeeaeceeceeeeaecaeceesaeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaesaeeaesaecaeseaesaesaesaeseaesaseeseaeeaeeeseaeeateas A 16 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 12 WAL E 1 1 1 2 Compatibility with CC Link eesesssssssssseeseeeeeeeenee 1 2 TS Features iere V HER EN EH E TIL e EUCH EHE RD eed 1 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 9 2 1 5 Pep b P EUR ESI E e Un 2 1 2 2 Applicable SySteM acts onem ie trente tet etd o n ete odi aunt ee e EO E ere 2 4 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be 2 4 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration soreer rtean enean EEN AKTAREN AREARE ETETEN ENERET AREEN 2 6 2 2 3 How to check the function version sese nne eene 2 8 2 2 4 CC LINK cmm 2 9 3 SPECIFIC
253. c refresh buffer size for each intelligent device station App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Master module Command Z RLPASET Network parameter Device memory 4 Execution result 3 Data link start 1 Pass the network parameters set in S1 to S5 to the master module specified by Un 2 The master module analyzes the settings of the network parameters 3 Ifthe network parameter settings are correct the data link is started 4 The device specified by D turns on b Itis only possible to execute one RLPASET instruction at a time App 34 App 34 APPENDIX Sequence program MELSEC Q C There are two types or interlock signals for the RLPASET instruction the completion device D and status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END Processing of the scan where the RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns On and OFF depending on the completion status of the RLPASET instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing When all the stations are normal END END END END END END END processing processing processing processing proces
254. cable only to one QJ61BT11N Even when more than one QJ61BT11N is mounted on the base unit the automatic CC Link startup function is applicable only to the first one It is applied to the QJ61BT11N that has the smallest start I O number as seen from the PLC CPU side b When performing an automatic CC Link startup without setting the parameters up to three MELSECNET H modules can be used on the master station CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 4 Communicating with intelligent device stations Remote net mode The remote net mode allows communication with all stations remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master stations Furthermore it allows not only cyclic transfer but also transient transmission which transfers data at an arbitrary timing to intelligent and local stations Setting method Set the remote net mode in Mode of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 5 Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode The remote I O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only the master station and remote I O stations The remote I O net mode allows cyclic transmission at high speed thus shortening the link scan time The table below lists the link scan times for both the remote I O net mode and the remote net mode Table 4 7 Number of
255. cal station is in the remote net ver 1 mode of the QJ61BT11N or is the QJ61BT11 the local station can communicate with the master station but cannot confirm the data of the ver 2 compatible station Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station Ver 2 mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Ver 2 compatible remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 8I tation number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x2 When the master station is in the remote net additional mode of the QJ61BT11N and the local station is in the remote net ver 2 mode of the QJ61BT11N a link is performed as shown in the following areas Local station Ver 2 mode Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Local station Ver 1 mode Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Master station additional mode Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 4 Ver 2 Station number 1 icompatibleStation number 2 Station number 2 remote output Rv Station Station number 3 Station number 5 Loca
256. cates the setting information for the scan interval delay time 0 to 100 50 u s Stores the parameter information area to be used CPU built in parameters Dedicated instruction parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction and data link startup Du Default parameters automatically starts CC Link Stores the parameter setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of each station 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SW009C to OF 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only x4 This register checks and stores the status only at link startup 8 33 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 4 8 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description EL mee Online Offline Master station Local station SWOO6A Stores the switch setting status 66A Switch setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 WO06D P ean Max link scan time Stores the maximum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units AE Current link scan time Stores the current value of the link scan time in 1 ms units ENE 006 s vs Min link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units
257. ce program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 3 1 1 5 33 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is
258. ce station 1 Master station intelligent device station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master station and a response from an intelligent device station is received Expression Maximum a RIRD value instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant ea rae ee eee x1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QOGHCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 16 1 x 4 067 0 5 5 12 3 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS x BC write points 1672 X 1 13 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant L Jw aoe x1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words OT LS X BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms
259. ceive buffer of the master module 3 Stores the data that is read after the device specified in D1 and the device specified by D2 turns ON The RIRCV instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRCV instruction the completion device D2 and the status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRCV instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program 3E 4 ON 3 RIRCV instruction SEE M 2 ON Completion device VE l On Abiiornal completion Status display Ne ey ee ee device at completion Receive completion RYn OFF RXn OFF Other end station send ready d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot
260. ching complete Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Stop instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion SB0045 Data link stop status bE44 b5 complete OFF Not complete ON Stop complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBOO0C signal can Forced master SB0046 switching be executed or not 5E4u b6 executabla sfat s OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station Temporary error temporary error invalid instruction invalid complete OFF Not executed status ON Temporary error invalid station established Specified station number is invalid Temporary error Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary SBO004A invalid canceling error invalid cancel instruction 5 4 010 acknowledgment OFF Not executed status ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standb
261. chronous 51 7 Delay time setting Sets the link scan interval Unit 50us x1 For the setting data specified invalid default parameter will be applied App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Slave station setting data Setting range Setby The type of slave station number of occupied slave stations and station number are set as follows b15 to z bii to i b7 to bO qoo Ere number obe of occupied slave stations Type of slave station The default parameter settings are 01014 to 01404 station number 1 bs 64 number of occupied slave stations 1 type Setting of the number of occupied slave stations N 1 umber of occupied Setting slave stations H Staion 82 0 Station 2 Station 3 User 82 00085 Station 4 Setting of the type of slave station Type of slave station Ver 1compatible remote I O station Ver 1compatible remote device station Ver 1compatible intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible single remote device station Ver 2 compatible single intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible double remote device station station station station station station 2 Perform the settings for as many connected modules involved in communication as has been specified by the control data App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Reserved station specification data Set data Setting range Setby Specify reserved s
262. ck code 5 check code 6 check code CH 7 check code CH 8 check code Error code 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN XO XOF xi SW80 0 4 0 Hr E mc NO M100 p v90 y y NO M100 Initialization procedure registration SB5F 38 RST SBOD XI01B 1078 H X1018 56 SET SBOD X1078 AJ6SVBTCU 68ADV initial setting change Initial setting change 959 344 MOVE 1000 H30 1001 MOVP H200 11003 1 MOVP K16 1005 SET Y1019 X1019 J 90 RST Y1019 AJeSVBTCU 68ADV digital output value read X101B X1000 92 0500 1 X1001 0501 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 124 OVP W8 D508 J Error reset SET YIOIA e Y101A X101A 3 149 ME RST YIOIA The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 34 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal Turns off initialization procedure registration directive Turns on initialization procedure registration directi
263. closed by the broken and dotted lines in the program example shown in d must be modified as shown below Forced master switching request sesseeeeeeee M200 M10 M200 SB46 1 SET SB0C NCR NO 1 M11 Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation SB5D HK st SBOC 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 Handy Functions This section explains some handy functions of the QJ61BT11N 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration function The initial settings of remote device stations which in previous models were done using the sequence program can now be performed using the GX Developer for registration to the PLC CPU Settings such as A D conversion enable disable and Averaging processing specification can be performed easily with the AJ65BT 64AD For an example of an initialization procedure using the GX Developer see Sections 10 1 3 10 2 3 and 10 3 3 1 Initialization procedure setting method The initial settings are performed using the Remote device station initial setting in the network parameters A maximum of 16 stations can be set When 17 or more remote device stations are connected perform the initial settings for the 17th and subsequent stations using the sequence program a In Target set the station number of a module
264. cludes the duplicate head station number 13 10 13 10 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Error details Cause of error occurrence details Loading parameter compatibility error B30B Loading parameter The contents of the installation status compatibility error and network parameters do not match Standby master station Specification error B30D Initial status Temporary error invalid station Specification error B310 B311 Data link stop error Data link restart error Standby master station absence error All station fault error Switching target error Forced master station switching error Network startup setting mode error B381 Station number switch setting The station number switch was outside of Set the station number switch error the setting range within the setting range B383 Transmission rate setting The transmission rate setting switch is switch setting error set outside the range 13 11 Table 13 1 Error code list 2 6 The station types of the module are different from parameter settings Example Parameter setting Connected module Remote Set the correct parameters Remote I O device Remote I O Intelligent device Remote device Set the contents of the installation status and network parameters to match Specify the station number that corresponds to the standby master station Master station switching was instructed to a station other tha
265. communication station number recognized by the master station 510071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Unable to receive data to the remote register RWr in Check the parameters Is the corresponding station set as a reserved a remote device station station Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Are there any overlap station numbers Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SW009C to SW009F Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written from the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter informatio
266. completed 8 89 10 3 3 with an error 11 100 10 ae In this case the QJ61BT11N with the smallest SD start I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically Do not make any settings for other than switches 3 4 Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if settings other than for switch 4 are made Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Remote net ver 2 mode y w 0100 pe End Cancel Remote net additional mode Pot 0100 Remote net ver 1 mode e 0000 or blank 0100 MEE 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 2 Program example Refresh of SB SW SM400 4 SB0040 to SBO1FF are read 0 FROM HO H5E4 K4SB40 K28 E to 580040 to SBO1FF FRON uo H640 swao Kade SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Parameter setting M402 SB6E H s SET M300 Instruct to set parameters RLPASET instruction Control data 4300 H 35 mov KO 0 Clear complete status Mov K15 1 All setting data Valid mov K3 D2 7 Number of connected modules involved in communication mov K3 D3 Number of retries 3 times wov KI D4 4 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Operation specification when wv 0 D CPU is down stop mov D6 4 Scan mode specification Asynchronous mov KO D7 Dealay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M300 Y 11 2101 D10 First Local s
267. condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 8 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device
268. cted The total number of connected stations depends the f 6 stations per branch MUNI stations on the branch line CC Link specifications The CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used CC Link dedicated cable Mixing of different brands of CC Link dedicated Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable cables is not allowed Mixing of different brands of Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables is allowed Terminal block Off the shelf terminal block When wiring cables for the main line side try not to T branch terminal block connector Connector Connector for the FA sensor remove the covering as much as possible ICE947 5 2 comparable product is recommended CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable uses 110 Q terminal resistor Length of cabl n th o4 Length of cable between the se d ki me Maximum length of main line distance Transmission Maximum length etween T remote I O stations or remote in li intelligent device station and between T branches and length of branches device stations i x2 cable between stations ihe adjacent stationis 625kbps 100 m 328 1 ft 1 m 3 28 ft or 3 E No limit 30 cm 11 8 in or longer mis ee 1t Or longer 156 kbps 500 m 1640 5 ft 2 m 6 56 ft or longer 8 The cable length of 1m 3 28 ft or longer is for a system configured only with remote I O stations and remote device stations 4 The
269. cted stations 1 to 32 100 328511 Number of connected So md tst nate 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft 39 cm 15 35 stations 33 to 48 40 cm 15 75 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 10 Mbps 30 11 81 39 15 35 40 cm 15 75 in to 69 cm 27 17 in 30 m 98 43 ft 70 cm 27 56 in or more The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 20 m 65 52 ft Number of connected stations 49 to 64 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Example When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps and 43 remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using the CC Link dedicated high performance cable because the cable connecting the second and third stations is 35 cm 13 78 in the maximum overall cable distance will be 80 cm 31 5 in First Second Third 4th 43th M i i Remote I O station Remote device Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote device station station 1 m 3 28 ft 50 cm 19 69 in 35 cm 13 78 in 50 cm 19 69 in 2 Fora system consisting of remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent device stations Local station Local station or intelligent or intelligent device station device station Master station Remote I O statio
270. d and causes the PLC CPU to run an interrupt Section 4 4 2 program Automatic CC Link startup Starts the CC Link automatically by turning the power on Section 4 4 3 Performs communication with all stations remote station local Remote net mode E Section 4 4 4 station intelligent device station and standby master station Shortens the link scan time for a system consisting only of the Remote I O net mode Section 4 4 5 master station and remote I O stations By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as reserved stations they will not be treated as data link faulty Reserved station function stations If any of the connected modules is specified it cannot Section 4 4 6 perform data link The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points Event issuance for the interrupt program Prevents modules that may be powered off in the system Error invalid station setting function configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4 4 7 setting the network parameters Performs link scan by synchronizing with Synchronous mode sequence scan Scan synchronous function F s Section 4 4 8 Perform link scan without synchronizing Asynchronous mode with sequence scan Temporary error invalid station Prevents modules specified by GX Developer from being treated Seconda ection 4 4 setting function as data link faulty stations temporarily during online operation Data link stop restart
271. d and the maximum overall cable distance is described below 1 For a system consisting of only remote I O stations and remote device stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station or remote device station or remote device station 2 2 1 1 5 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Q Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate 1 2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 110 m 360 9 tt 9 ft 5 Mbps 59 23 23 60 cm 23 62 in more 1 3 28 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to En 50 m 164 1 ft 59 23 23 10 Mbps 60 cm 23 62 in to EY 80 m 262 5 ft 99 cm 38 98 in 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 er Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate x1 x2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 900 m 2952 9 ft 2 5 Mbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 400m 13724 IG 5 Mbps 160 m 524 96 ft Number of conne
272. d by the master local station RWr Points of the remote register RWr refreshed by the master local station RWr2 Points of the ver 2 remote register RWr refreshed by the master local station SB Points of the link special relay SB refreshed by the master local station SW Points of the link special register SW refreshed by the master local station aE File register R ZR transfer time on memory card only when file register is used KM1 Constant 1 Master station QO2CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 Local station Q02CPU QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q e W Constant When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit 2 048 48 032 32 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit i x10 3 Q02CPU QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 06 Example When the PLC CPU type is the QOGHCPU the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master station and 1024 points of RX 896 points of RX2 1024 points of RY 896 points of RY2 128 points of RWw 128 points of RWw2 128 points of RWr 128 points of RWr2 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file register KM1 2 X RX RX2 RY RY2 SB RWw RWw2 X 16 RWr RWr2 X 16 SW X 16 16 0 22 0 00043 X 1024 896 1024 896 512 128
273. d master to standby Forced master switching SB000C was instructed again while the master station was being switched to the standby master station Check ON OFF of Forced master switching 5 000 Use the RLPASET instruction according to the procedure below 1 Clear the settings of the network parameters and refresh parameters of the target module using GX Developer Set the type of I O assignment setting in GX Developer to intelli Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer to 01004 4 Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU The RLPASET instruction was executed for a module whose parameters have been set by GX Developer The parameter setting was changed without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Set the transmission rate setting switch to within the setting range MELSEC Q Detectability Master station Local station Foo Issue the requests after the x data link is started 13 TROUBLESH TIN OUATE MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 3 6 Eror code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station The station number including the Station number setting error number of occupied stations of the Set within the range of 1 to parameter station infor
274. device to be used for the initialization condition Setting range RX SB 5 Executional condition settings Device Number Set the device number to be used for the initialization condition Setting range When RX is selected 0 to 37F H When SB is selected 0 to FF H 6 Executional condition settings Execute Condition Set the conditions under which initialization is performed Setting range ON OFF 7 Details of execution Write Device Set the device to which the contents of the initial setting are written Setting range RY RWw 8 Details of execution Device Number Set the device number to which the contents of the initial settings are written Setting range When RY is selected 0 to 37F H When RWw is selected 0 to OF H 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 Details of execution Write Data Set the contents of the initial settings Setting range When RY is selected ON OFF When RWw is selected 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration unit 1 Target station 3 x Input format m DEC Execute perational Executional condition Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data Execute Setnew RX osjon x Execute Same aspevsat 8 v wwr Execute Setnew H x Ewcue Setren gt 7 et new et new et new et
275. dress 148 to 149H 14 to 14BH 14 to 14DH 14Ex to 14FH 150 to 151 152 153 154 to 155 156 157 158 159 15 15 15 to 150 15 15 Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 17 to 17B 17 17D 17 to 17F 180 to 181H 182 to 183H 184 to 185 186 187 188 189 18 18 18 180 18 18 190 to 191 192 193 number Station Buffer memory address H to 195u Hto 197H H to 199H H to 19BH H to 19Du H to 19FH Hto 1A1H H to 1A3H H to 1A5H H to 1A7H H to 1 9 H to 1 number Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AF 1 0 to 1B1 1B2u to 1B3 1 4 to 1B5 1B6x to 1B7 1B8 to 1B9 1 to 1BB 1 to 1BD 1 to 1BF 1C0u to 1C1H 1C2u to 1C3H 1C4u to 1 5 1C6u to 1 7 Station number Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1C9H 1CAu to 1CBu 1CCH to 1CDH 1 to 1 1D0H to 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 107 108 109 10 to 10 10 100 10 to 1 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored Two words
276. ds of the CC Link system Connect the terminal resistors between DA and DB There are restrictions on the case where the A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is used as the master station in a T branch system configuration Refer to Section 7 6 1 for details 3 The terminal resistors to be connected vary depending on the types of cables used in the CC Link system Cable type CC Link dedicated cable 110 1 2 W brown brown brown Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable 130 Q 1 2 W brown orange brown 4 The master module can be connected at points other than both ends 5 Star connection is not allowed 6 The connection method is shown below Master module Remote module Local module Terminal resistor Terminal resistor SLD CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable IMPORTANT CC Link dedicated high performance cables cannot be used with other cables such as CC Link dedicated cables or Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables If used together correct data transmission will not be guaranteed Connect the shielded wire of the CC Link dedicated cable to SLD of each module and ground both ends of the shielded wire using D type grounding via FG The SLD and FG are connected within the module 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 5 1 Wiring check The following explains how to check the
277. e When station numbers are specified by skipping one station number 3 Standby 5 Local master station station occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations Station number 0 Master station Station number 1 1 Remote I O station occupies 1 station Station number 2 2 Remote device station occupies 2 stations Station number 9 4 Intelligent device station occupies 1 station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Station number 9 Station number i 1 Remote 2 Remote device station 3 Standby master station 4 Intelligent 5 Local station station device station Data link faulty station If this station is set as a reserved station it will not be treated as a faulty station Specify unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations An unoccupied station number will be treated as a data link faulty station can be verified with link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings Transmission rate and mode settings are specified with the transmission rate mode setting switch For details on the transmission rate mode setting switch see Section 7 3 The transmission rate that can be set varies depending o
278. e 0 to 15 zer If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn b15 to 5011 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and Completion mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device App 19 App 19 APPENDIX 1 Fu a Master station PLC CPU Command amm 1 Device memory 4 Master module MELSEC Q nctions Operation chart for the RISEND instruction Specified station Intelligent device station RX RY Buffer memory Send buffer App 20 1 Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of the master module 2 Writes the data specified by S1 2 and S1 3 into the buffer memory specified by S1 1 At this time handshaking will be performed by the interlock signal specified by S3 3 Awrite complete response is returned to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns ON The RISEND instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station App 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RISEND instruction
279. e I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode iis 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 2 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Devi f Y M L B T T D W Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR a Cert isi c aD NNNM R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register peces eR etre I T RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 10 22 10 22 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Stop gt continue Scan mode setting Asynehrongus synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified 799 master station Station k Expanded Number of Remote Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word No Station type cyclic setting occupied station points station select stations Send Receive Automatic 1 Ver 1Remote device station singl
280. e Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to HEX a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 7 10 7 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 8 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational
281. e buffer 0 word Not specified or 804 128 word to 10004 4096 word However the total automatic buffer size must be 10004 4096 word or less POINT 1 Forthe communication buffer size specify the size that is calculated by adding seven words to the data size to be sent or received For the automatic update buffer size specify the size required for each intelligent device station 2 The network parameters other than operational settings and mode setting are also made valid when the PLC CPU is switched from STOP to RUN Table 6 2 indicates the reference sections for the detailed explanation of the parameter setting methods Table 6 2 Reference om I section Remote net ver 1 mode Section 6 3 Parameter setting with Remote net ver 2 mode Section 6 4 GX Developer Remote net additional mode Section 6 5 Remote I O net mode Section 6 6 Remote net ver 1 mode Parameter setting with Remote net ver 2 mode Section 6 7 dedicated instruction Remote net additional mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 4 Station
282. e data link status can be checked with bit data link special relays SB and word data link special registers SW The SB and SW represent the information in the buffer memory of the master local module which is used by reading to the device specified in an automatic refresh parameter e Link special relays SB Buffer memory addresses 5 0 to 5FFH Link special registers SW Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH 8 4 1 Link special relays SB Link special relays SB0000 to SBOO3F are turned ON OFF by the sequence program and SB0040 to SBO1FF are automatically turned ON OFF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address When the standby master station is controlling the data link the availability of the link s special relays is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station the availability of the link s special relays is identical to that of a local station For the correspondence with the buffer memory see Section 8 3 2 5 Table 8 5 Link special relay list 1 5 Availability Number Name Description EL Available x Not available Online Offline Master station Local station Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002 580000 5 0 b0 Data link restart OFF Restart not instructed ON Restart instructed Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is Refresh
283. e i n 3 Remote O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 output RY Remote station Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station is being used as input data by the master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 FUNCTIONS Master station controlling Station number 1 0 MELSEC Q d When the standby master station becomes faulty and the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Standby master station Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote Remote Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 X00 to XOF to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Master station input Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station Remote Remote output RY input RX Remote put RX Remote output B RYOO tg RYOF RYJ to RY1F RY20 to RY2F Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote l O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 4 3
284. e instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example When XO is turned ON this program stores 10 word data to DO and succeeding addresses from buffer memory address 1004 of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO D101 D102 D103 D104 Tar eres A evn ee ne at AVE E NEN ORA ER E cya et eat ANE EOS SE diee tanien e ignes ta Er ee etr te en eas cas IMP NOE OQ Sa eee ee ee eg Ree Re net Rage ent ORT CENE SECO UU o etl App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 RIWT instruction The RIWT instruction writes the data for the specified points to the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ra user File Direct function register register Word module d ma Instruction Execution symbol condition Command RIWT c amp 6 63 I 1 Command RIWT f
285. e link scan interval using Delay information settings Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 Unit 50 u s Example Set to 10 500 u s Setthe station data using Station information settings Default value Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station including local station and standby master station Expanded cyclic setting cannot be changed single Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Remote station points cannot be changed 32 points when occupies 1 station 64 points when occupies 2 stations 96 points when occupies 3 stations 128 points when occupies 4 stations Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the system configuration specified in Section 6 3 CC Link station information Module 1 x Exclusive station count Expanded Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word Btation No Station type cyclic setting points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Remote 1 0 station singe
286. e of power off and continues the data link with only the Section 4 3 1 normal modules When a module which has been disconnected from the data link Automatic return function because of power off returns to the normal status it Section 4 3 2 automatically joins the data link Data link status setting when the Sets the data link status when an error that enables the master station PLC CPU has an Section 4 3 3 or operation to continue occurs at the master station PLC CPU Setting the status of input data from Sets the status clear hold of the input receive data from a ection 4 3 a data link faulty station station that became data link faulty because of power off Slave station refresh compulsory e Sets whether output data to the slave stations will be refreshed clear setting in case of PLC CPU Section 4 3 5 STOP or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU comes to STOP l Continues the data link by switching to the standby master Standby master function f Section 4 3 6 station when a problem occurs in the master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Table 4 3 lists the handy functions Table 4 3 List of the handy functions Description Reference section Remote device station initialization Performs initial setting of remote device station using GX Section 4 4 1 ection 4 4 procedure registration function Developer Issues events when the conditions set by GX Developer are establishe
287. e output RY Device name mei M M L B T C ST D W RWr ed MN RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR BEEN Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR PO Remote output RY 11 38 11 38 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 __ Automatic reconnection R o station count Default 1 OoOo Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous TT Scan mode setting Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program Device comment i Parameter Start 1 0 No si PLC paramete Operational setine Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Local station E Remote pass Master station data link type EL Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register R wir Remote register F ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register R wi Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection s
288. e range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Setthe ver 2 compatible remote input RX refresh device using Ver 2 remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1500 f Set the ver 2 compatible remote output RY refresh device using Ver 2 remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1500 g Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWr refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 h Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWw refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device
289. e s SERMONE 96 points No setting 4 Ver 2Remote device station quadruple oes 64 points No setting b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below JELSOFT series GX Descer Mies parnwetets X the CC Link list B I ire Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards 9 88 Program HF Device comment i 5 18 Parameter Start 1 0 No s PLC paramete Operational 127 Network parat Type Master station data link type Mode Allconnect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register R wr Remote registerF ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No Blank no setting Operational settings Master station PLC parameter auto start Remote net Ver 2 mode 2 Remote pass EL Device memory Device init PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information 4 Remote device station initial Interrupt setting _ Stop Asynchronous Station information tinc ___Interrupt settings Indispensable settings Ready 10 23 No setting Alreadyset Set
290. e station to station cable length If wiring is done other than as specified accurate transmission of data cannot be guaranteed Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module do not pull the cable When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module e Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning or retightening terminal screws and module installation screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the modu
291. e to communicate from a local station remote Is data read from the correct address of remote output RY to the master station remote input RX RX buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Unable to communicate from the master station remote output RY to a local station remote input RX Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 5 13 5 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Unable to communicate from a local station remote output RY to the master station remote input RX Unable to communicate from the master station remote register RWw to a local station remote register RWr Unable to communicate from a local station remote register RWw to the master station remote register RWr 13 6 e Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the
292. e when standby master function master station duplex function is used e Control start relay used when master station is operating M10 e Control start relay used when standby master station is operating M1 1 54402 SET M10 Control start relay when the master j station is operating SET T Control start relay when the station master station is local station is XO OF SB7B operating x1 Xi KK E 9 e Mo Initial device set NO MO SB5A BOVE KAX1000 101000 Ke Save remote input RX and emote register RWr data to W device BMOVP D1000 W1500 K16 J Control ladder when the master station is operating BMOVP 1000 K4Y1000 K8 M u gt Set the saved data to remote output RY and remote register RWr BMOVP W1500 D2000 K16 J SB5A SB5B I 4 HWA fet SBI Refresh change instruction request ON 5342 SB43 RST SBI Refresh change instruction request OFF sEr M10 J Control program when the master station is operating SB7B Sh Control ladder when the standby master station is operating Local station operating Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation When forcibly switching the data link control right from the standby master station to the master station The areas en
293. eck the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F e Check the LED display on the corresponding local station e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 e Check the max communication station number 5 0071 e Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Is the corresponding local station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match Is the corresponding local station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station Is data read from the correct address of remote register RWr buffer memory of the master station Is the corresponding local station number recognized by the master station 13 6 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match 51 0098 t
294. ed For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY Remote device station Remote device station T PLCCPU station number 1 station number 4 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1compatible EE X100F to X1000 RXOF to RX00 ME X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 Y100F to Y1000 RYOF to RYOO EE Y101F to Y1010 RY1F to RY10 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Ver 2compatible X150F to X1500 EE 1 RXOF to RX00 X151F to X1510 RXIFtoRXIO X152F to X1520 mE X153F to X1530 Y150F to Y1500 RYOF to Y151F to Y1510 m RY1F to RY10 Y152F to Y1520 ME Y158FtoY1530 i 10 52 10 52 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Remote device station station number 1 Remote device station station number 4 PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1compatible for write W100 RWwO A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw1 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting RWw3 Average processing specification RWWwA CH 1 average time number of times setting RWw5 CH
295. ed During Data Link Do the parameter Settings and the installed system configuration match properly Revise the parameter settings or installed system configuration Are the master Station link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 other station data link status turned on Master station malfunction Are the master Station link special registers SW0098 to SWO009B station number overlap status turned on Check on master station side Check the module for which SW0098 to SWOO9B on Check the module for which SW0080 to SW0083 are on Check on slave station side station number switches set properly Are there any station numbers that are incompletely matched 2 Is the power on Turn on the power Set the station number switches properly Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Is there a POWER LED on the module Corresponding module malfunction Is the supplied power within the specified range Set the supplied voltage to within the specified range Is the RD LED lit Is the communication cable wired properly Correct the communication cable wiring Corresponding module malfunction Y Y Y To next page To next page To next page x1 Check for short circuits reversed connection disconnection terminal resistors FG connection
296. efresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX inset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lg Project Edit Find ew Online Diagnostic a lx 3 il POPPP salei B se zziz in 5010128 t mE Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 Program 9 1 Device comment 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 si PLC paramete perational settinc Operational settings iw Network Type Master station Ex E Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x 8 Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode Device init All connect count 2 Remote input R 1000 Remote outputf RY 1000 Remote registerF wir wa Remote register ww 100 Ver 2 Remote input FiX 1500 Ver 2 Remote output RY 1500 2 Remote register R wi w1000 Ver 2 Remote register Aww w1500 Special relay SB SBO Special registerSW sw Retry count 3 Au
297. efresh parameter dialog box provides the following choices When Y is specified the remote output RY is cleared regardless of the parameter setting When specifying any device other than Y e g M or L make parameter setting whether the remote output RY will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared When using GX Developer for setting use Version 8 03D or later 1 Target output send data The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas Local station station number 4 Local station station number 3 Remote device station station number 2 Remote I O station Master station station number 1 Remote input RX Station number 1 4 Input Station number 2 Remote input RX Remote output RY Station number 1 Remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 1 jL Station number 4 Station number 2 Output Station number 3 IN Station number 2 Suonmmbe3hel 1 Ll l Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWw Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 K Station number 3 S
298. egister Aww Special relay SB Special register S Ww Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting z Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset E Ready 1002 Host station Ove NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Setthe station type using Type Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 Parameter name Number of exclusive stations ICC LinkL Exclusive station 1 bd r Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting H
299. emote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start 80 Device memory Mode Remote netlVer mode x Device init All connect count 1 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote registerFi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register E ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop hs Scan mode settine Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting _ Asynchronous Station information Initial settinc Interrupt settings _ 4 No setting Alreadyset Setif itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Ready 002 Host station Ovrwrte 11 4 11 4 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh de
300. equired for use in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode 4 Usable slave stations Any of ver 1 compatible slave stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations is usable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration The system should be designed with the following considerations to prevent mis input from the remote I O modules 1 When powering on and off Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I O modules Turn off the power to the remote I O modules after stopping the data link Data link start Data link stop During operation Master module data link status During stop ON Remote I O module power status OFF 2 During momentary power failure of the remote I O modules When a momentary power failure occurs in the power 24 V DC being supplied to the remote I O modules mis input may occur a Cause for mis input due to a momentary power failure The remote I O module hardware uses the power by internally converting the module power 24 V DC to 5 V DC When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I O module the following condition occurs Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I O module to turn off gt Response time for input module on off Therefore mis input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time indicated by 1 in the figure below Remote I O module module power supply and input extern
301. er SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station Station Station number 2 number 4 number 9 Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 compatible Station Ver 1 compatible Station Master number 1 remote device local station number 8 intelligent i i RAE Sp station Remote 5 occupies 4 Reserved device station eaters stations occupies 4 upi ubi pe 1 station quadruple double station stations 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings
302. er 4 Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX Station number 1 L Output Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 MELSEC Q Target areas for clear hold Areas retained regardless of the setting The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output RY in local stations either clear or retain data from faulty stations according to the setting The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote register RWw and remote register RWr in local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of the setting When the data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station input data remote input RX from that station is retained regardless of the setting 2 Setting method Set the Operational setting value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 F UNCTIONS 4 3 5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP This function compulsorily clears output send data to slave stations when the PLC CPU comes to STOP Remote output RY refresh device setting in the automatic r
303. er memory address 3E0H Un G992 to check the RX RY RWw RWr assignment status of the module 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable This section explains how to perform a T branch connection using the CC Link dedicated cable 7 6 1 T Branch system configuration The following shows a system configuration using T branch connection tee EN block connector Remote l O station remote device station Main line Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station Master remote device station station I Branch line Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Local station EET Y intelligent remote device station A maximum of 6 stations device station can be connected lll A maximum of 6 stations can be connected Branch line Branch line Branch line Terminal resistor between DA and DB Terminal resistor between DA and DB Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station remote device station The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length When the model name and hardware version of the
304. er station intelligent device station when local station is operating Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote register register Remote Remote output register Hee t RX RY Rww wp Put RWw RW When data link is st d duet ted bbe GS 1o an ONE Ee Continue Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue by the master station PLC CPU data link continue When data link is st d duet ted UE dad Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue 3 Continue Continue by the local station PLC CPU data link continue Clears the receive The GX Developer Clear other Retains the When data link for data link faulty P All point an 4 ata link fau oints stations receive area the entire system is ENS Undefined Undefined Undefined Hold stconad station is set local OFF Retains the receive from other PP station setting Hold areas from other stations stations Clears the receive area from a remote I O station with a When a ee a The GX Developer communication communication error data link faulty error k power off etc S Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station is set local Retains the receive occurs in a remote tation setting 5 station g area from a remote I O station with a communication error Clears the receive Retains the area from a remote i receive are
305. er the data link is controlled by the master station or standby master station 5 Using loop Displays the line in use 6 Line status Displays the line status 7 Loop type Displays the line type 13 16 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q POINT When conducting a network test do not perform write to buffer memory address 5bEOH 2 Other station monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of other stations stations other than the one to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 Select CC Link for Module Setting 2 Specify the target master module of Monitoring other station for Module No or I O Address 3 Click the button 4 Click the button Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station Start Monitarir Stop Monitoring Close b Monitoring items 1 Station Displays the head station number of each station 2 Reserve Displays whether or not a reserved station is set Reserved station is set t Reserved station is not set 3 Invalid error Displays whether or not an error invalid station is set x Error invalid station is set i Error invalid station is not set 13 17 13 17 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Station type Displays the station type The CC Link compatible version is also displayed in the remote net ver
306. erence an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown below Status confirmation of AJO5BVBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Xo XOF Xi 5180 0 d o Hr M wc NO M100 e y O NO 100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting X1018 38 MOVP 100 1 MOVP H31 W101 1 MOVP 200 W103 1 MVP W105 SET Yi08 SET y1019 AJ6SVBTCU 68ADVinitial setting change L 0000000000000 Initial setting change 4 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting processing X1018 4 98 RST yioig X1019 J 122 53 RST yioig AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting X1518 124 MVP 508 H31 wi509 MOVP HO w508 SET yi518 SET yi519 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed To the next page 10 50 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV J AJ6SVBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 avera
307. essing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m Remote device station response time ms 20 3 2 3 1 5 39 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Master station RY remote device station RY This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote device station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequen
308. est flag RY19 Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 10 30 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS From the previous page AJeSVBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change Initial setting change MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable 1911 Wu TP disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range HD MoS J setting RWw9 ar SET 7 Turns on initial data setting E request AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting processing T iaid X1078 urns off initial data 178 RST Y1078 processing completion flag RY18 X1079 initi Turns off initial data setting 202 RT Y1079 request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU 68ADV X101B 1000 s Reads CH 1 digital m en ur w m 1 output value RWrO X1001 4 Reads CH 2 digital I Doy p301 J output value RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 236 MO
309. et by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer f Automatic refresh is not performed The devices should be refreshed via the FROM TO instruction or the G device g ltis not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared h The standby master function is not available i In order to change the parameter setting method turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU The following table shows how the PLC CPU operates when changing the parameter setting method without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Parameter setting method Parameter setting method Lo E Error notification method Continuity of data link before change after change Parameter setting with GX Parameter setting with the The RLPASET instruction Data link continues Developer RLPASET instruction completes with an error Parameter setting with the Parameter setting with GX LINK PARA ERR occurs in Data link stops RLPASET instruction Developer the PLC CPU Note that data link continues to be performed if the designation of operation at CPU down S1 5 of the RLPASET instruction is s
310. et to Continue When the PLC CPU is switched from RUN to STOP RY of the master station and outputs to the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations are retained 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability This section explains the functions for improving the reliability of the CC Link system 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off function This function disconnects remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have become data link faulty due to power off and continues the data link among normal remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station no setting is required Local Local station station Master Down station Remote Remote station station Terminal Terminal resistor resistor Continues data link excluding faulty stations POINT In the event of cable disconnection the data link cannot be performed because there is no terminal resistor ERR LED lights up Local Local station station Master station Remote Remote station station EPA I o Terminal Disconnection Terminal resistor resistor 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when
311. et ver 1 mode Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote station Remote device station Intelligent device station Local station Standby master station Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product points and configuring a new system Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible slave station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points Select this mode when the system consists of only the master station and remote I O stations Since cyclic transmission is made at high speed the link scan time can be reduced Remote I O net mode Remote station 15 Reserved station function Stations that are not actually connected stations to be connected in the future Will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserved stations The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points see Section 4 4 6 Stations that will be connected in the future Reserved station Local Master station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 8 Station number 10 4 stations Remote station Remote station occupies 1 station Reserved station Remote station Remote station J dier SOY 4 occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations 1 O
312. etion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRD instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Execution completion of ON the RIRD instruction OFF j 2222 i jON OFF PED EOSo E i ON Abnormal completion OFF Normal completion 1 ie cei 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRD instruction is 8 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO auo Mem the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When th
313. following procedure a Setthe No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Number of ex a CC LinkM station 1 Y r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data p Case of CPU STOP setting 7 2 zi Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name j r E e station 1 n r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily
314. from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the ver 2 compatible remote input RX refresh device using Ver 2 remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1500 f Set the ver 2 compatible remote output RY refresh device using Ver 2 remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Wi
315. g X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 lm Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Window 218 x allta c malti t D TES EE Fe dea E e E E A osla S espe aaa 1 ale lel ziale sa is e Ep lalalala li Program zI A of Sl 12 1 mnl xl z Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program t IV Device comment i 2 3 Ei uf Parameter Stat 120 No 0000 W PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 15 Network parai Type Local station T E 5 Remote pass Master station data link type z i z 18 Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 18 Device init All connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf Ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEiX 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote reaister E wr Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special
316. g of the remote device station esssneeeenennenen n 10 7 1 Setting the target station number sssessssssssssssseeeee nente nnne tnnt trennt 10 7 2 Setting the regist procedure registration cccceccecceseseeceeceeceeeeeecaeceeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeeeseaneaes 10 7 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings seenenn 10 11 10 1 4 Creating a program sssssssssssssssseseeeeeee eene nnne tns tne 10 13 A 9 A 9 10 1 5 Performing the data NE UNAN URNE 10 16 1 Confirming the operation with the LED 10 16 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program sse 10 17 10 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used sse nennen rennes 10 18 10 2 1 Configuring a System a oot et ro eta aie i teo ate eto at oe Edd 10 18 1 Setting the master SEatioh iiie irre cade trea te dtc eder tco ED Lg aca aede ED E 10 19 2 Setting the remote device station sess tenentes 10 20 10 2 2 Setting the master station parameters sse nennen 10 22 1 Setting the network parameters of the master
317. g the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting The points of each remote I O station can be set to 8 16 or 32 points This saves the refresh device points of the PLC CPU The remote I O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver 2 mode only For parameter setting use GX Developer of version 8 03D or later This function cannot be executed if the dedicated instruction is used for parameter setting This function can be executed when read write from to the CPU devices is performed according to the I O points of each station at cyclic data refresh using the FROM TO instruction Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote station Remote l O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 PLC CPU Master station Occupies 1 station 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station output RY 8 point output module Device area when remote I O points setting is made L Device area when remote I O points setting is not made Set points to even numbered 8 point setting remote I O stations consecutively If points are set to odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations select 8 points 8 points reserved in the remote station points setting of the last of the consecutive remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station n
318. ge time number of times setting RWw5 Average processing Turns on initial data Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 10 50 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q From the previous page AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change Analog output enable Bic NU 909 disable setting RWw8 wove 509 J ranges 1 E 1 Turns on initial data setting ST 87 F equest flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting processing X1518 Turns off initial data 178 RST Yib18 processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting PA ex BI we J request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 1018 X1000 5n 204 wo 0500 1 Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 v m J Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 236 MOVP w8 D508 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset r 1 Turns on error reset SET Y101A request flag RY1A
319. gs with GX Developer Remote I O net mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Master number 1 Station Station Station Station Station number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 station Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote X Y0O to 1F I O station station station I O station station occupies occupies occupies occupies occupies 1 station 1 station 1 station 1 station 1 station 6 6 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings _ MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list GE Project Edi Find Replace View Onine Diagnostics Tool Ael xl alert tea eo Brie te P z elas Dl al a e QALE la ele zala zs NH RENE Pogan zl z ofr al Fe ele ele zits ele 212 ler el Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 28 Program Device comment o 1 2 3 amp s Parameter Stat 70 No 0000 PLC paramete O
320. h parameters 4 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh Hr zo i Automatic refresh E Automatic refresh 14 Automatic refresh amp Automatic refresh Network parameters Receive area station No 1 station No 2 Remote output RY Sendareato Send area to Send area to Send area to Remote register RWr Receive area 13 station No 1 Receivearea from local station No 2 transmission Data communication between PLC CPUs can be performed in N N mode using remote input RX and remote output RY bit data used in local station systems as well as remote register RWw and remote register RWr word data for writing and reading used in local station systems Master station Buffer memory Remote input RX from local Receive area from local to local station No 1 a local station No 2 to Remote register RWw local station No 1 2 local station No 2 to zx Local station station number 1 Buffer memory Remote output RY Host station 3 station number 1 Link scan gt send area Receive area 3 from local station No 2 to Remote input RX Receive area from master station Receive area from master station
321. he The specification of the remote device Tum on the specification of the B124 remote device station initialize station initialize procedure registration remote device station initialize procedure registration function function was turned on at a station other procedure registration at the was executed than the master station master station The specification of the remote device Parameter not set error ofthe station initialize procedure registration rocedure registration function B125 remote device station initialize function was turned on without setting the p eg procedure registration function remote device station initialize procedure aner setting remote device registration station initialize procedure registration Check the communication status A data link error occurred at the of other stations whether or not a B201 Gidea stanon te corresponding station during transient temporary error invalid station is transmission specified or if the corresponding station is stopped A transient request was issued to other 205 Transient target station error than the intelligent device station Check the target station EE d Processing request error during Line test request was issued while the Perform a line test while the link B301 se link stop link was stopped is being established The specified station number exceeded Specified station number the highest communication station Specif
322. he execution result of temporary error invalid station specification 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station specification cancellation 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of the line test 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is added to a system using an automatic CC Link startup 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Data link stop result Temporary error invalid station Specification result Temporary error invalid station Specification cancel result Line test result Parameter setting test result Automatic CC Link startup execution result transmission path is affected by noise Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being disconnected or the transmission path being affected by noise Invalid parameter value Duplicate master station on the same line Error in switch settings Operating as a local station 0 Cancel 1 Set b15 Stores the details of the LED display status 0 OFF 1 ON 615614613612 611610 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b
323. he host 5 6 62 station setting status OFF No setting ON Setting exists Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the host OFF Clear ON Retain 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only SB0061 5E64 b1 Input data status of host data link faulty station 580065 5 6 65 8 PROGRAMMING Number 580066 BE64 66 Number of host occupied stations SB0067 5E64 b7 B006A bs Ro 10 Switch setting status SBO06D Parameter setting 5 6 b13 status SBOO6E Host station operation 5 6 b14 status SB0070 Master station 7 b0 information SB0071 Standby master 5 7 b1 station information SB0072 Scan mode setting bE74 b2 information Operation specification when CPU is down status SB0073 7 b3 SB0074 Reserved station 5 7 04 specified status SB0075 Error invalid station 5 7 b5 specified status Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 7 b6 SB0077 Parameter receive 5 7 b7 status SB0078 Host station switch 5 7 68 change detection Master station return specification information SB0079 7 b9 Table 8 5 Link special relay list 4 5 Availability MELSEC Q Available x Not available Online Description Master station Indicates the setting status
324. he master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms 20X1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan
325. he refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below Seer QNIN sul elel EL s de p le 50 pal a Program ZI Unset project No of boards in module yj Boards Blank no setting ta Program 1 Device comment 1 18 Parameter Hs Ez B a PLC paramete i i Operational settinc ii Network Type Master station 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start B Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 181 Device init connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wir Remote register Aww Ver 2 Remote inputf RX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register Wi Ver 2 Remote register E Ww Special relay SB Special register SW _ Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop __ mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt setting
326. hecked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 hd p Expanded cyclic setting r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data p Case of CPU STOP setting zl Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Setthe number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data single x r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel h Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using Expanded cyclic setting Default value single Setting range single double quadruple octuple Example Set to double Parameter name Number of exclusive stations L p Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel i Set the CC Link mode using Mode
327. hile and then retransmit transient overloaded status Check if the target station is an intelligent device station Check the requested module and cables Set to the remote net mode Check the transmission destination station number or change to host connection Wait a while and then retransmit non existing access code attribute was Set a correct access B801 Access code setting error set code attribute MELSEC Q Detectability Master station Local station 13 14 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 6 6 Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station Attribute definition error The attribute definition was invalid Transient transmission unsupported station Specification error Data points error The number of data was out of range The address was not a multiple of 16 Address definition error when the bit device was accessed The specified combination addresses and points exceeded the valid processing range B80D Setting range error B814 A transient transmission was executed B815 Module mode setting error mode B823 A transient request was issued to a station that has not secured a communication buffer area The communication buffer size of the corresponding station was out of range when a dedicated instruction was executed When the dedicated instructi
328. hronous mode the L RUN LED may be lit dimly 2 Asynchronous mode Performs data linking without synchronizing with the sequence program 3 Setting method Set the scan synchronous function in Scan mode setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Data flows in synchronous and asynchronous modes The data flows in both the synchronous and asynchronous modes are explained using examples of communications between the master station and remote I O stations a Data flow in the asynchronous mode Sequence scan Remote input RX i LLLLLI LLI Link scan ELS SS EP HHHH FTH Response time of the first station _ Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote H H H H H H I O stations i Pd p p Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 LOO i I Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Data flow in the synchronous mode 1 Sequence scan gt Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan H H H Remote input RX 7 1
329. ialization procedureexeoution x x 5E0n b15 proe OFF Not complete i ON Complete Remote davies station Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO005F initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB ae 7 oF instruction result Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 3 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 49 10 49 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference MELSEC Q For ref
330. icates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations 580082 Other station fuse SW0088 to SWO008B 5 8 62 blown status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data 580083 Other station switch linking 5 8 change status OFF No change ON Change detected Indicates the line status of the host Host line status OFF Normal ON Abnormal line disconnection Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error OFF No error ON Error occurrence Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station transient transmission OFF Normal status ON Abnormal Stores the test result of Line test 1 Line test 2 OFF Normal ON Abnormal SB0080 Other station data link 5 8 b0 status SB0081 5 8 b1 SB0090 5E9u bO SB0094 Transient 5 9 b4 transmission status SB0095 5E9u b5 SBOOB4 Standby master 5EBu b4 station test result 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 2 Link special registers SW Data is stored in the link special registers SW000 to SWOOSF by the sequence program and data is automatically stored in SW0040 to SWO1FF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory addresses When the standby master station is controlling the data link availability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is ope
331. ice station is not operating normally j remote device station e Check the sequence program When multiple remote stations are powered off at What is the setting for the retry count e Increase the transmission rate 156 kbps the L RUN LED goes off temporarily 9 y Reduce the retry count F A Has a value been set for the intelligent function Disable the intelligent function module switch setting CC Link cannot be started automatically module switch setting of GX Developer Is the switch 4 setting of the intelligent function Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch module switch settings correct settings of GX Developer to 01004 e Check the error code for the PLC CPU Are the various settings specified by the RLPASET e Check the error code for the master station instruction correct e Check the operation status of the PLC CPU for the master station When a dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on The abnormal completion bit turns on when the dedicated instruction RLPASET is executed Has the parameter setting method been changed without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU 18 7 13 7 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Receiv
332. ies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data single x r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel h Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using Expanded cyclic setting Default value single Setting range single double quadruple octuple Example Set to double Parameter name Number of exclusive stations p Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel i Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 2 mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings oject Edi Find Replace Online 20 ci 1 Tools Window Dig S m e eae elel alel ses ada iss gis e pepe S e ed esl Progam TI zj Sh Sl sepe ale
333. if itis needed No setting Z Already set 002 Host station Ovrwrte gt iS 10 23 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 N Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 C Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO A Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO O Setthe refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX MEI Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list ed mulie esl 4 s5 ER ER EB 29 le gb sn aE5 css cert BRIS FAG No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting B rtp Unset project 9 88 Program E Device comment 1 2 3 if Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 19 PLC paramete Operational
334. iguring a system As shown below a system where one ver 1 compatible remote device station and one ver 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 38 10 38 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD P DB 4 ire CL DG 9 7 10 39 10 39 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Setting of AJOBVBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68ADV ON N conl K B SEL
335. ime is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms Master station RWr local station RWw
336. in 16 bit units from the master station to the remote device station Expressed as RWw for convenience Remote register Read area for CC Link Information entered in 16 bit units from the remote device station to the master station Expressed as RWr for convenience Generic term for AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 ASACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for ABUSCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Generic term for QO0OJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU QO02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QCPU A mode Generic term for QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A QnCPU Generic term for QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU and QO2CPU Generic term for QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Generic product name of the product types SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n in the model name is 4 or greater Q series modules other than the CPU module power supply module and I O module that are mounted on the base unit A series and QnA series modules that are mounted on the base unit excluding the CPU module power supply module and I O module QnACPU QCPU Q mode Q
337. in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory 3 Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer Using GX Developer makes the setting of the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters easier The data link is automatically started if GX Developer is used to set the parameters Using GX Developer to set the parameters has the following advantages e It is not necessary to write a program for setting the parameters t is possible to perform automatic refresh in the system In case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the dedicated instruction RLPASET the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer Network parameter Auto
338. ine Master station Local station Number Description Indicates the temporary error invalid status 0 Normal status SW007C s 1 Temporary error invalid status 67Cu SW007 b15 614 bi3 6012 670 Temporary error 16 15 14 13 SWoo7E invalid status 32 31 30 29 67 48 47 46 45 W007F 64 63 62 61 67 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the data link status of each station 0 Normal SW0080 1 Data link error occurrence 6809 51 0081 015 614 613 b12 b3 b2 b1 bO 6814 Other station data link 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 d sumo sions suos 6831 Indicates the watchdog timer error occurrence status 0 No watchdog timer error SW0084 1 Watchdog timer error occurrence 6844 SW0085 b15 b14 b12 Other station 685u watchdog timer error SWO084 tle SW0086 occurrence status SW0085 32 6861 91 0086 SW0087 SW0087 6874 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 6 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Offline Master station Local station Number Description Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station
339. ing Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 p Data link disorder station setting Naas M Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting z Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 Parameter name 1 Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 hd r Data link disorder station setting Expand Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting E Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Setthe number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operationa
340. ing settings Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh D STOP setting Default Refresh C Refresh Clears compulsorily Master saton Mater station Master station Riper function Master station Duplex function peed station Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line Remote I O net mode Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 2 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR PY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W Ror ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX _ Device name Select from X M L D W Ror ZR d Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR RW RWw or ZR Special relay S Device name Select from M L B D W R SBor Alo Special EUIS Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote output RY 11 32 11 32 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 Retr n im Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1 to 10 station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby
341. ings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY2 completion device RX2 error code storage device RWr2 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO Mi S83 E MOV D11 MOV D2 MOV H400 D13 MOV D14 MOV H2 D15 MOV H202 D16 Mv D17 GP RIRCV uo D10 D40 D15 M20 RST Mt M20 MELLE LZ Sven E i Performs normal completion processing 5 2 Mae HAGO OG EDGE M eu Nest App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction The RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and writes data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ra user File Direct function register register module Word Instruction Execution symbol condition EN RISEND GRISEND Command RISEND I 4 e RISEND 6 6 Oo Set data n range Data ae Un number of the module _ to FEH Binary 16 bits 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Device name E the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored E device S3 Start number of the device in which the interl
342. ion Because the system employs the bus connection method even if a module system fails due to power off it will not affect the communication with other normal modules Also for a module using a 2 piece terminal block the module can be replaced during data link Replace the module after turning off the module power However if the cable is disconnected data link to all stations are disabled see Section 4 3 1 Station number 4 Station number 7 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station T station Remote station stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations Data link continues Station number 4 Station number 7 Faulty station Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 st tion Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations 7 Automatic return function When a station that has been disconnected from the link due to power off recovers the normal status it will join the data link automatically see Section 4 3 2 1 6 1 6 1 VER izle MELSEC Q 8 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error The data link status can be set to either stop or
343. ion occupies 4 stations Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Address Description RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 Single axis valid M code RWr5 Single axis error number Single axis present feed value Single axis feed speed RWr6 Single axis warning number RWr7 Single axis operating status t 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and intelligent device stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in an intelligent device station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the intelligent device 3 The intelligent device returns a writing complete response to the master station 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module RIWT Send buffer 2 Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIRD instruction 1 The data in the buffer memory of an intelligent device station is accessed 2 The data read is stored
344. ion setting checklist Expanded Number of Remote aen buffer select Word Station tain eect Sond Station type cyclic occupied station station select P Receive Automatic TEF m Bises App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Expanded Number of Remote Me et buffer select Word Station lator Sena Station type cyclic occupied station station select P Receive Automatic PEN E 44 44 INDEX A B C Appendix 2 2 IER Rees App 1 Applicable CPU see 2 4 Applicable system 2 4 Automatic CC Link startup 1 9 4 51 Automatic return function 1 6 4 26 Automatic update 8 21 Buffer memory list sess 8 5 CC Link dedicated cable 3 3 CC Link diagnostics 13 16 CC Link ver installation parameter matching Statys decet nete 8 38 COC Link version sese 2 9 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations 12 1 Communication between the master station and local stations 11 1 Communication between the master station and remote device stations 10 1 Communication between the master station and remo
345. ions lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 Condition 1 1 X a 2 X b 3 X c 4 X d x 64 Condition 2 16 A 54 X B 88 x C lt 2304 aT 1 module for each system Maximum 26 A S oT X A Master station Master station Master station Local station Local station Local station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable 26 42 64 P d ae C A B C ic E Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I O station 00 000 zin 00 000 onnu Og i RS 232C Analog digital Remote I O module Interface module converter module AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BT R2 AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BTC 32D CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor required i Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SYS CONFIGU O MELSEC Q 2 Remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the foll
346. irmation of data link status Xo XOF Xi o Hr wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1080 18 X21 11 27 V P Z Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station er 5 program Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station J Program to generate send data to the master station 11 27 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN Controlling data link I MST SMST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR O O LERR b LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on o otf Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed uM eds normally RUN LRUN MS
347. is set to STOP e Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the master module station number setting Switch to the station number of the module for which the test is to be performed Set the transmission rate mode setting Switch for the master module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR uc a To the next page MELSEC Q 2 Checking the status of communication with a specific remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station line test 2 Line test 2 checks whether data linking can be performed normally with a specific remote station local station intelligent device station or standby master station Execute line test 2 according to the following procedure 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module At normal completion of test The L RUN LED lights up At abnormal completion of test The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result MELSEC Q PR RAMMIN e 2 MELSEC Q 8 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains comm
348. ist lg Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagno indow 18 altal irf c xpo ampie ure pae 1 ci Diu S ool 15 elel lel ses ada iss Program zf zj Shr No of boards in module 1 gt Boards Blank no setting 2 3 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings 1 Type Master station X 2 Re pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x 8 Device memon Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode x 18 Device init All connect count 5 1000 Y1000 WO W100 SB0 swo ur 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting 2 Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting L1 Indispensable settings No setting Alteadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Project i Ready 00219 Host station NUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number W
349. ister i RWr 2 rom the remote device local intelligent Master station Section or device standby master Read only For receiving 8 3 2 3 stations Local station a xt For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station Stores the offset and size of RX RY RWw RWr Slave station offset DE Section 7 per remote station local station intelligent device Read only size information 8 3 2 4 station standby master station Read write Section Link special relay SB Stores the data link status enabled 8 3 2 5 write may be disabled Link special register depending Section Stores the data link status onthe SW 8 3 2 6 Use prohibited The specified data is stored and used by Read write Section Random access buffer o transient transmission enabled 8 3 2 7 Stores the send and receive data and control data when performing transient transmission Communication buffers communication using the communication buffers with the local station standby master station and intelligent device station Stores the automatic update data when Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read write Section buffer AJ65BT R2 communication using the enabled 8 3 2 9 automatic update buffer Read write Section enabled 8 3 2 8 O Available Not available 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 3 3
350. ite Device Number Condition Device Number Data ON ww orc 10 28 10 28 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0 and bit 13 BEOH b13 Table 10 2 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Berhol device station the initialization procedure registration 580000 While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and 5E0n b13 initialieation procedure remote registers stops Qik di 5 registration instruction s OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOOSE Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure SE5u b14 device station initialization DFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SE device station initialization procedureexeoution x x 5E0n b15 proe OFF No
351. ithin the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When settin
352. l Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station that are specified with the GX Developer from being treated as data link faulty stations while online It allows the replacement of modules while online without error detection 1 Input output status at temporary error invalid station setting All the cyclic transmission data of the stations set as temporary error invalid stations is refreshed However when a station set as a temporary error invalid station becomes faulty the input is retained and the output switches off 2 Setting method Set the Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Monitoring other station Invalid station if temporary error using the GX Developer Place the cursor at the station to be set as a temporary error invalid station and click Setting Cancel CC Link 7 CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station __ Station Reserve Invalid Error Station Type Number MEE o CCT r Invalid station if temporary error 3 Setting
353. l settings module 1 x r Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting I Clears compulsorily Cancel h Setthe CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 1 mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings oject Edi Find Replace Online 20 ci 1 Pe Paar S Dig a m e eae ale zisa s Heel laelle EET Progam TI zj Sh Sl sepe ale zal Bale a m x No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings T Local station T Master station data link type Remote 1 mode T 4 KIKI 4 2 indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setiftisneeded Nosetting Alteadyset z Project i Ready 0 Host station I wwe 2 Setthe automatic refresh
354. l station additional mode Station number 3 Occupies 4 stations Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 7 Standby master station additional mode Station number 7 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Station number 3 Stat Station number 6 Station number 7 to octuple x3 The remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with the QJ61BT1 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Whether send receive is enabled or not The following table indicates whether send receive of cyclic data is enabled or not Receive station QJ61BT11N Master station Ver 2 mode Additional mode Ver 2 i Ver 1 2 i Ver 1 Ver 2 i Ver 1 compatible i compatible compatible i compatible compatible compatible area i area area E area Ver 2 compatible area i NE mode Ver 1 compatible area Master Ver 2compatiblearea i d station mode Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2compatiblearea CUeIEFHIN mode Ver 1 compatible area i Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Local Ver 2 compatible area i station mode Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2compatblearea i Ms r 1 compatible area ER ee QJ61BT11 ET i ee iteligentdevcestaton device station Ver 1 compatible p oe 2
355. l station intelligent device station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points local station is 30 points Remote station local station intelligent device Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote device station local station intelligent station standby master station device station standby master station Number of link points per station Remote register RWr 4 points remote device station local statiory intelligent device station standby master station master station ommunication method ynchronous method Encoding method ransmission path ransmission format Error control system CRC X 2 X 1 CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 2 Varies according to the transmission rate See Section 3 1 1 3 1 2 Connection cable Automatic return function RAS function Slave station cut off function Error detection by the link special relay register Number of I O occupied points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points V DC internal current consumption 0 46 A Weight 0 12 kg 1 Indicates the number of link points for remote net ver 1 mode For number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Refer to the table 3 2 2 CC Link dedicated high performance cables cannot be used with other cables such as CC Link dedicated cables or Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link
356. le Mov KO D105 7 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop mov KO D106 1 Scan mode specification Asynchronous mov KO D107 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 albas 261 4 moy H2101 110 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 MOV H102 111 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOV H103 112 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 3 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14 for station No 20 App 38 App 38 APPENDIX Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M303 2781 mov mov MOV Parameter registration data link startup M303 D100 D110 D150 D160 um H eP RLPASET 00 Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M304 339 K100 K100 KO D170 SET D170 D171 D172 M304 M303 SB3 M310 Start of the control program M310 XOF N305 Performs abnormal completion processing 362 ME Mc NO 320 NO 4320 Refresh of SB6E l 380 MW FROM HO HOEO K4X1000 K6 Refresh of RWr SB6E 396 FROM HO 2 0 D1000 K4 Station number 1 control program 51180 0 7 413 Station number 1 control program Station number 2 control program Sw80 1 427 Station number 2 control program i Station number 3 control program 80 2
357. le If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number May 2003 SH NA 080394E A First edition Japanese Manual Version SH 080395 A This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SAFETY PREGAUT IONS 5 22 6 2 2 2 2 12 di ei
358. le used About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation Description QJ61BT11N Abbreviation for QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module Cyclic transmission Transmission method by which to periodically communicate the contents of remote I O and remote registers Transient transmission Transmission method with which the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is used at an arbitrary timing Master station Station that controls the data link system One master station is required for each system Local station Station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Remote I O station Remote station that handles bit unit data only Performs input and output with external devices AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D Remote device station Remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only Performs input and output with external devices and analog data conversion AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Remote station Generic term for remote I O station and remote device station Controlled by the master station Intelligent device station Station that can perform transient transmission such as the AJ65BT R2 including local stations Standby m
359. lic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 1 1 10 30 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME e MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple e NEC CNN ENT 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 x 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20X1 X2 10 50 ms ROCESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 6 M
360. link faulty station when it returns to normal Automatic return f nction a oii par dedu tante eere HER c eter 4 26 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an 4 27 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty Station sss 4 28 4 3 5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 4 29 4 3 6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function 4 31 4 4 Handy Functions 1 e Lt ave ed d c t d i v d e i ede 4 45 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 4 45 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program 4 48 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup 4 51 4 4 4 Communicating with intelligent device stations Remote net 4 53 4 4 5
361. m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple pee gp IE 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3x 1 3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 X 1 x 1 10 30 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple e NEC CNN ENT 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded c
362. master module are as indicated below in a T branch system configuration change the terminating resistor connection method as described below When using the other master module connect the terminating resistor packed with the product AJ61BT11 Hardware version C or earlier AJ61QBT11 Hardware version C or earlier A1SJ61BT11 Hardware version D or earlier A1SJ61QBT11 Hardware version D or earlier 1100 5 1 2W x 4 Connect between DA and DG DB and DG both ends Use a commercially available terminal resistor of 110 5 and 1 2 W resistance 110 and 130 resistors that are supplied with the master local modules cannot be used Connection 1100 1100 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list The following describes the communication specifications for T branch connection For communication specifications not listed below see Section 3 1 625 kbps 156 kbps 10 M 5 M 2 5 Mbps are not allowed 100m 500 m Indicates the length of the cable between terminal Maximum length of the main line resistors The length of the T branch cable branch line 328 1 ft 1640 5 ft 7 length is not included Maximum length of the branch line m 26 25 ft Indicates the overall cable length per branch Overall branch line length 50 m 164 05 A 200 m 656 2 ft Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable Maximum number of conne
363. master switching request from the line OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switch from the standby master Master switching request station to the master station is complete complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether a forced master switching request has been Forced master switching acknowledged or not request acknowledgement 0 Not acknowledged 1 Instruction acknowledged Master switching request acknowledgement 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Table 4 5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function 2 2 Number 580050 5 5 613 580062 5 6 b2 SB0070 7 b0 80071 7 b1 SB0079 7 b9 SB007B 5 7 b11 Forced master switching request complete Host standby master station setting information Master station information Standby master station information Master station return specification information Host master standby master operation status b Applicability Applicable x Not applicable Description Master A Offline station Local station Indicates whether a forced master switching request acknowledgement is complete or not 0 Not complete 1 Switching complete Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists 1 Setting exists Shows the data link status 0 Data link control by the master station 1 Data link control by the s
364. matic refresh parameter Write to PLC Master station Remote I O station Remote device station amp 95 Data link start Local station Setting method For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction It is possible to use the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters of the master station and start the data link Using the RLPASET instruction to set the parameters has the following advantages e t is possible to mount five or more QJ61BT11N modules see Section 2 2 1 for details about the number of CPUs that can be mounted It is possible to change the network parameter settings while the PLC CPU is running It is recommended to use GX Developer to set the parameters when the number of QJ61BT11N mounted is 4 or less Parameter setting direction Control data set RLPASET instruction RLPASET m instruction completion Refresh Write to PLC direction 2 Remote I O station Remote device station 00000 2 o0000 Data link start 1 Setting method For more details on the setting see Section 6 7 For the RLPASET instruction see Appendix 2 7 2 Precautions when using the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters a The remote I O net mode cannot be used The module operates in remo
365. mation parameters was setto 40 other than 1 to 40x The total number of occupied stations set parameter exceeded 64 The number of all occupied stations Set the occupied station Dee puse ee 20 07 Write operation was performed to a use Do not write to any of the use prohibited area not used in the buffer prohibited areas not used in memory the buffer memory parameter parameter was set to other than O to 2 2 Write operation was performed to a use Do not write to any of the use B389 Use prohibited area write error prohibited area not used in the buffer prohibited areas not used in memory the buffer memory The number of remote device stations Set the remote device station to B38B Remote device statlon setting was set to 43 stations or more with the 42 stations or less with the foo x error parameter d Rates station information parameter station information parameter The number of intelligent device stations OR Intelligent device station setting including local stations was set to 27 M T error parameter stations or more with the station station information parameter information parameter Other than module head station number or station number not specified in the parameter was set with the invalid Set the Head station number of station specification parameter the module Example of other than head station Do not specify any of the number st
366. mber 1 to 64 station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 Onvoff timings of link special relays SB relating to the standby master function The following shows the on off timings of the link special relays SB relating to the standby master function SB70 Master station information SB7B Host master standby master operation status SB5A Master switching request acknowledgment SB5B Master switching request complete SBO01 User operation Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB42 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching SB43 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching ON ON OFF When SBBB is turned on the program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw In addition the program turns SBO1 on 4 FUNCTIONS Master station MELSEC Q 6 Program example when the standby master function master station duplex function is used A program example is created under the following conditions when the standby master function master station duplex function is used a System configuration Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 l Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 b Parameter settings of the master station Start 1 0 No Operational setting Type Master
367. mber of cyclic points select one from the following two modes Remote net ver 2 mode Mode suitable for configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Mode suitable for adding a ver 2 compatible slave station to the existing ver 1 system In the remote net ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points cannot be increased When using GX Developer for setting use Version 8 03D or later The number of cyclic points per module can be increased as indicated in the following table Table 4 8 Expanded cyclic setting double quadruple octuple Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Remote register RWw RWr 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points Remote I O RX RY 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Remote register RWw RWr 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points Remote I O RX RY 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points Remote register RWw RWr 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Remote net ver 2 mode This mode is designed to configure a new system The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below Per station RX RY can be increased to up to 128 points and RWw RWr to up to 32 points Per CC Link network RX RY can be increased to up to 8192 points and RWw RWr to up to 2048 points Remote device station Local station Remote device station Remote station Ver 2 compatible Ver 2
368. mber of occupied stations 1 IRX30 to RX3F IRX40 to RX4F RYAOtoRY4F UU X00 to XOF YO00 to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Standby master station input Standby master station controlling Master station Station number 1 gt 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote I O station Station number 2 RX00 to RXOF RY00 to RYOF m LL 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station 10 RXIF RY10to RY1F m 4 fi l i 1 Station number 3 RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to XOF Yoo to YOF od ABL pone Number of occupied stations 1 RX30 to RX3F 1 X10 to X1F Yita YIR 1 3 1 ed RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F Data in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or retained according to the Data link faulty station setting in the network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote input RX Remote output RY Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations Remote input RX Remote output RY
369. mber of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Data link Station number 2 Station number 4 ata n Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 11 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function This function performs the initial setting for the remote device station using the GX Developer without creating a sequence program see Section 4 4 1 12 Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues an event when the conditions set by the GX Developer are established in order to make the PLC CPU execute the interrupt program see Section 4 4 2 13 Automatic CC Link startup By installing the QJ61BT11N the CC Link is started up and all data are refreshed by simply turning on the power without creating a sequence program However when the number of connected modules is less than 64 it is necessary to set the network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time see Section 4 4 3 14 Selecting a mode according to the system The CC Link system has four types of modes according to various systems See sections 4 4 4 4 4 5 and 4 4 14 The overview of the modes is described in the following table Connectable Mode in which complete compatibility with the conventional module 61 1 is achieved Remote n
370. mber setting switch AWSBrBi48D 0 1 AjsBrGii T 0 2 AusBrBi deDT 0 3 a S MITSUBISHI MELSEC Avesets1 16p Bw RATE S 004 2 PW LRUN SD RD LERR O OO OG STATION NO NOU 0123456789 ABCDEF 28 2 1 QUE 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Setting range Setting value Input data hold clear Hold C clear Default Clear Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh gt Clears compulsoril STOP setting Default Refresh CRefresh gt Master station Mater station Masterstaton Duplex function Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station y Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode ripis net ver 2 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode R Additional Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote I O net mode ering Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 Default 64 Remote net Ver 1 mode Device
371. me see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 X 1 X 1 10 30 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting m 1 3 7 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link
372. me is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X 2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM 15 X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3 3 10 39 ms DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME _ MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20 X 1 x 3 10 70 ms 2 Master station RY local station RX This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON OFF until the local station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan t
373. mmunication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote l O station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote output RY Station Remote input RX Address 420 RY ED to RY EO ED to RX EO 400 to to to RX1FCF to RX1FCO 41FCu 43FCu 43FDu 43FFu RY1FCF to RY1FCO RY1FDF to RY1FDO RY1FEF to RY1FEO RX1FDF to RX1FDO 41FDu RX1FEF to RX1FEO 41FEu H i i 1 i i 1 1 4209 1 i i 1 1 js i RY1FFF to RY1FFO js number 112200 TRY F o Rr x9 AX F to RECO 4000 imber 1 2014 RY 1F to RY 10 RX1F to RX 10 40014 42024 RY 2F to RY 20 RX 2F to RX 20 4002 42034 RY 3F to RY 30 to RX30 40034 4204 RY 4F to RY 40 RX4F to RX40 4004 42051 RY 5F to RY 50 5 to 50 4005 42064 to RY 60 i RX6F to RX60 4006 Station 42074 RY7F to RY 70 RX7F to RX70 4007 station number2 4208 RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 4008 number 2 RY 9F to RY 90 420A4 RY AF to RY AO RX AF to 400A 420B4 to RY BO RX BF to RX BO 400B 420C4 to RY CO RX to
374. mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 1 mode h Set the total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop 3 Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q n Setth
375. mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Ver 2 Station number 1 Output compatible remote Station number 2 output RY Remote output R Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY quadruple MEE double POINT 1 In the remote net ver 2 mode the remote registers of the remote I O station are set to 0 points 2 When the ver 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted the refresh devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added or deleted slave station Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4 8 Setting method Using GX Developer set the network parameters For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS Master station additional mode 2 Remote net additional mode This mode is designed for use when slave stations including a ver 2 compatible station is added to the existing ver 1 system The program of the existing system can be used as is Remote I O station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Remote device station Ver 1 compatible Sta
376. mote Set to the remote net ver 1 B984 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to modelfemate VO net moda x the master station of the QJ61BT11 4 When the remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode is set to the local station of the QJ61BT11 the local station operates in the remote net ver 1 mode App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Parameter Setting Checklist This checklist may be used to set the parameters required to configure a CC Link system Please make a copy of this checklist and use it as needed For more details see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 Appendix 6 1 Parameter setting checklist Parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Hola clear station setting Default Clear f CP Refresh cl Isoril cobi Sid nd Operational STOP setting Default Refresh occupied stations Default Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple i ng Default single Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line All connect count Remote input
377. munication buffer The communication buffers stores the send and receive data when performing transient transmission communication using the communication buffers between the local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations The communication buffer sizes for the local station standby master station and intelligent device station are set with network parameters For more details on the communication buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Example of communication using the communication buffers Master station Local station first module CPU CPU Buffer memory 1 gt Device memor y Receive buffer for the first module 1 Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the CPU 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the receive buffer for the first module Master station Local station first module CPU CPU 2 Buffer memory gt j 1 Send buffer Hag HH for the first Duce MOMON module 2 gt 1 Stores the data to be written in the buffer memory of the local station or to the device memory of the CPU in the send buffer for the first module 2 Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the CPU 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 Automatic update buffer The automatic update buffer s
378. n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n 5 X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X Remote device station processing time ms 20X1 3X3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 2 3 1 1 5 42 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole n
379. n SW0067 Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in a remote device station e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules SW0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station 13 4 13 4 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in Do the settings match 51 0098 to SWO009B the remote device station e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWOO09C to SWOO9F Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station pe
380. n Local station Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in case the standby master station becomes faulty OF OFF Not requested ON Requested Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the Heinote devica station initialization procedure registration 580000 While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and initialization procedure 5E0n b13 registration instruction remote registers stops OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Indicates the module access module operation status Module status OFF Normal Module is operating normally ON Abnormal Module error has occurred Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Startup instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion 580041 Data link restart status 5 4 b1 complete OFF Not complete ON Startup complete Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master SB0042 acknowledgment Switching have been acknowledged 5E4n b2 us at standby OFF Not executed ster switching ON Instruction acknowledged resh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master 580043 complete status at Switching is complete 5 4 b3 standby master OFF Not executed switching ON Swit
381. n Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station 2 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations x2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate 1 2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 5 Mbps eer 110 m 360 9 ft 59 23 23 in 60 cm 23 62 in or more 2 m 6 56 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to ee Ea 50 m 164 1 ft 59 cm 23 23 in 60 cm 23 62 in to 80 m 262 5 ft 99 38 98 in 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to m 5 Mbps 59 2323 in 2 m 6 56 ft or more 60 23 62 150 m 492 15 ft 70 cm 27 56 in to f 50 m 164 1 ft 99 cm 38 98 in 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this
382. n checking the communication status of all stations Select All stations for Target station and click the Execute Test button 6 When checking the communication status of specific modules Select Selected station No for Target station specify the station number and click the Execute Test button Loop test xi r Operation state of all stations Normal m Illegal Reserved m Invalid mam NEN Loop test Target station All stations 1 54 C Selected stationNo POINT When conducting a loop test do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0n 608H 13 19 13 19 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 4 H W Information This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module local modules and standby master module a Operating procedure Diagnostics System monitor 1 Select the QJ61BT11N 2 Click the button 3 Click the button Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QJB1BT11N Product information 050320000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base Slot Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status r Error Display Display format wo Error Present Error No
383. n number 3 36 RET 2 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 4 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote I O stations first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote I O station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on Oo Off Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally L RUN RUN Controlling data link MST S MST Sending data ERR LERR e am 5 5 N Ne oe s 4 b LED display of the remote I O station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot AJ65BTB1 16D PW LRUN SD RD LERR e eo Ne oN oN oN oN 24 V DC is being supplied The data link is being performed normally 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 For example when X00 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16D station number 1 is turned on Y40 QY41P of the master station turns on 2 When X21
384. n number setting Module 1 b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJE5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to A D conversion enable the first condition Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 25 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND RE
385. n online The module can be replaced without detecting an error in online see Section 4 4 9 19 Data link stop restart The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used see Section 4 4 10 20 Station number overlap checking function This function checks the status of the connected stations to see if the number of occupied stations is overlapping or if there is more than one station with the station number setting of 0 in the system see Section 4 4 11 1 10 1 OVERVIEW 1 11 MELSEC Q 21 Transient transmission With this method of transmission the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is performed at an arbitrary timing see Section 4 5 Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RWT Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RRD Buffer memory Device memory Send buffer 1 11 1 OVERVIEW 1 12 MELSEC Q 22 Compatibility with conventional module The QJ61BT11N achieves complete compatibility with the conventional module QJ61BT11 in the remote net ver 1 mode Select the remote net ver 1 mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product 23 Cyclic points increase Selection of the remote net ve
386. n parameter setting does not meet the following condition Z Station information setting error lt 2304 Sete parameter hanit A Number of remote I O stations meets the condition shown on x parameter B Number of remote device stations left C Number of intelligent device stations including local stations The number of occupied stations in the NC Number of occupied stations station information parameter was set to Set a value within the range x ing error parameter s setting error parameter a value other than 1 to 4 Tone Number of connected modules o Connected motos Set a value within the range parameter was set to a value other than 7 setting error parameter 4 to 64 from 1 to 64 Invalid station specified error parameter Communication buffer assignment error Automatic update buffer assignment error Standby master station The standby master station parameter PA 390 specification error parameter set to a value other than 1 to 64 13 12 13 12 13 TROUBLESH TIN us MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 4 6 Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station The station number set with the station 1 Change the parameter setting number setting switches of the standby master station differs from that set in the Ors taster sition ot change St
387. n return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified I Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop m Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q n Setthe link scan interval using Delay information settings Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 Unit 50 u s Example Set to 10 500 s Setthe station data using Station information settings Default value Ver 1 Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Ver 1 Remote I O station Ver 1 Remote device station Ver 1 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Ver 2 Remote device stati
388. n the standby master station Temporary error invalid station specification and line test requests were issued before starting the link Specify a temporary error invalid station while the data link is performed with parameters set using GX Developer or the dedicated instruction Execute Data link restart SB0000 for the station that has stopped a data link with Data link stop SB0002 Execute Data link stop SB0002 for the station that is performing a data link A temporary error invalid station was specified while the data link is being performed upon automatic CC Link startup Data link restart SB0000 was executed for the station that was performing a data link Data link stop SB0002 was executed for the station that had stopped a data link Forced master to standby master switching SBOOOC was executed in the system where no standby master station exists or in the system where the standby ues master station had become faulty master switching SBO00C Forced master to standby master After starting the data link of the switching 000 was executed in the standby master station execute system where all stations had become Forced master to standby faulty master switching SBOOOC Forced master to standby master D switching SB000C was executed for y 9 any station other than the master station for the master After starting the data link of the standby master station execute Force
389. n the total distance For more details see Sections 3 1 1 and 3 1 2 Use the same transmission rate for the master station remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station If the setting for even one of the stations is different data link cannot be established properly 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test After connecting all of the modules with CC Link dedicated cables verify that they are correctly connected and that data linking can be performed with remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station Line test 1 checks the status of communication with all modules that have been connected Line test 2 checks the status of communication with specific modules Neither line test 1 nor line test 2 requires parameter settings 1 Line test 2 is performed when an error is generated by line test 1 Thus if the result of line test 1 is normal there is no need to conduct line test 2 2 Network parameter setting is required to execute Line test 2 for the standby master station 1 Checking the connection status and the status of communication with remote stations local stations intelligent device stations standby master station line test 1 Perform the line test according to the following procedure Check items prior to executing line test 1 Verify that the PLC CPU RUN ST
390. nHCPU Intelligent function module Special function module Product Components The components of the QJ61BT11N are listed below Item name Quantity QJ61BT11N main unit Terminal resistor 110 1 2 W brown brown brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated cable or Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor 130 1 2 W brown orange brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated high performance cable 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the specifications parts names and settings of the QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module hereinafter referred to as the QJ61BT11N which is used with the MELSEC Q series PLC CPUs 1 1 Overview The CC Link system connects distributed modules such as an I O module an intelligent function module and a special function module using dedicated cables so that these modules can be controlled by the PLC CPU 1 By distributing each module to an equipment device such as a conveyor line and a machine device the wiring efficiency of the entire system can be accomplished 2 On off information of input output and numeric data that are handled by modules can easily be sent and received at high speed 3 By connecting multiple PLC CPUs a simple distributed system can be configured 4 By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi s partner manufacturers the system can provide flexible solutions
391. ncluding the remote device station and intelligent device station as well as the remote I O station CC Link startup and complete data refresh can be performed by just turning on the power without creating a sequence program Use this function to make an operation check when constructing a system When performing control always set the network parameters 1 Power ON Reset 5 STOP RUN PCL CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station 2 Identifies QJ61BT11N 3 CC Link startup 4 CPU refresh processing Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station first module 64th module first module 64th module 1 Contents of default parameter settings at automatic CC Link startup The following lists the contents of the default automatic refresh parameter settings and network parameter settings when the automatic CC Link starts up Content of default automatic refresh parameter settings Q02 Q02H Q06H f T Master station m Master station Q12H Q25H Q12PH Direction Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU side Direction local station side local station side Q25PHCPU side RX0000 to RXO7FF X400 to X7FF RX000 to RX3FF RY0000 to RYO7FF Y400 to Y7FF RWr00 to RWrFF W600 to W6FF RWw00 to RWwFF W700 to W7FF SB0000 to SBO1FF SB200 to SB3FF SW0000 to SWO1FF SW200to SW3FF Content of default network parameter settings Remote net ver 1 mode connected stations re Number of retries 3 time
392. nd the remote register RWw of other local stations 14 The word data stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters 15 The word data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and local stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in a local station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in a local station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the local station 3 The local station returns a writing complete response to the master station 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RMT Send buffer Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in a local station using the RIRD instruction 1 The data in the buffer memory of the local station is accessed 2 The data
393. nd the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of a remote device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RXOF to RX00 uto 4 Handshaking signals RX1F to RX10 L 2 RX1F to RX10 such as remote READY RX2F to RX20 and initial data us ee ocessing request fla 3 to RX30 o i iioc lis RXSF to RX50 2 RX1F to RX10 WEN RX7F to RX70 LLLA 1 RXoF to RX00 Signal direction AJ65BT 64AD Master module Device No Signal name RX00 CH1 A D conversion completed flag RX01 CH2 A D conversion completed flag RX02 CH3 A D conversion completed flag RX03 CH4 A D conversion completed flag RX04 to Not used RX17 RX18 RX19 RX1A RX1B RX1C to Not used RX1F 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5
394. ndom access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the send buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter 3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A mode QnACPU AnUCPU and writes the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 10 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffer Memory contents Buffer in the intelligent device station Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H station Remote register Link special relay EET Link special register 2 Device memory in the PLC CPU Word muc e Output relay Y Hexadedmal _ 02 Decima 034 Decimal _ 89 jHexdeoma 23 Decimal 09 Decimal om wegen 1 1 Retentive timer contact st decimal Retemivetmer oo ST o Retentive timer nam value ST Lo poema f Decimal t Decimal 12h a o E L O eoma im E p Oo Counter contact Counter coil Counter present value Dataregister D OR 04 Hexadecimal au Decimal Link register File register 59 O pesi
395. ne completion processing lt 22 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 5 RIFR instruction The RIFR instruction reads the data from the automatic update buffer of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ra user File Direct function register register module Word Instruction Execution symbol condition Pamimand RIFR GRIFR Command RIFR GP RIFR Un ni n2 D n3 Set data Setting range Data type Un number of the module 0 to FEH Intelligent device station number 1 to 64 Random access buffer specification Binary 16 bits The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent Between 0 and parameter setting value 1 device station specified by the master station or the random access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored i Device specified device Number of points to read 0 to 4096 Binary 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to 0 App 23 App 23 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RIFR instruction Specified station Master station DN PLC
396. new et new et new et new et new et new Default End setup 2 Validate initial settings Before creating a program for communication with remote device stations create a program to validate the initial settings that use SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction and SB5F completion status of remote device station initialization procedure For more details see Sections 10 1 4 10 2 4 and 10 3 4 en en en co 41414144 OPO no orn orn et new ho oo ee 4 a 4141444 4 wo et new Cancel 3 Preparation for communication with remote device stations 1 Register the network parameters and the created program in the PLC CPU 2 Reset the PLC CPU or turn the power from off to on 3 Instruct the master station to start the initial processing This instruction may not be necessary in some cases such as when the remote input RX is set as a startup condition POINT 1 Because one step is performed per link scan as the number of settings increases the processing time will extend beyond that specified in the sequence program 2 While SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction is on the refresh of the remote input output and remote registers stops 4 FUNCTION 22 MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues events signals to execute
397. ng RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CH 1 digital value setting RWwo0 500 CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog output enable disable flag RYOO Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RYO1 Read CH L check code RWr0 RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 55 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally L RUN RUN Controlling data link MST S MST Sending data ERR LERR s e oe s 4 b LED display of the remote device station For both the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN confirm that the
398. ng the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below amp MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list BEE Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 8 TE BEDL E alel ll t mE Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program
399. ngs b Setting the standby master station Set Type in the network parameters to Standby master station Set the mode according to the mode setting of the master station ucc E Start 1 0 No xe rl Operational setting Operational settings Type Master station data link type ELE Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v All connect count See ar Remote input RX 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wt Remote register RwWw W100 Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output AY SSS al Ver 2 Remote registerfE wr Ver 2 Remote register R ww a Special relay SB Special reqister S W Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No D PLC down select DENN Scan mode setting x Delay infomation setting Station information setting _ Remote device station initial setting 1 1 Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions on using the standby master function a Only one standby master station exists in a single data link system b The total number of stations is 64 including the standby master station The number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is one or four c If an error is detected at the master station in the initial status before parameter communication starts switching to the standby master station will not be executed d When the master station becomes fa
400. not be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 4 App 4 APPENDIX 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIRD instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU 1 Command G RIRD 1 Buffer memory 2 Device memory Device memory Receive buffer 2 1 Accesses the buffer memory specified by S 2 and S 3 of the station specified by S 1 or the PLC CPU device 2 Stores the data that has been read in the receive buffer of the master module 3 Stores the data that has been read after the device specified in D1 and the device specified by D2 turns on b The RIRD instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously However for the same local station or intelligent device station this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location App 5 App 5 APPENDIX Sequence program RIRD instruction Completion device Status display device at completion App 6 MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRD instruction the completion device D2 and status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at compl
401. nt of RX RY RWw RWr Check the numbers of RX RY Assignment error is greater than the maximum number of RWw and RWr points in the points station information setting When the standby master station was operating as the master station with the Return the network parameter Parameter mismatch master station duplex function the setting of the master station to network parameter setting of the faulty the original value master station was changed The mode set in the control data of the Check the control data of the RLPASET instruction differs from the RLPASET instruction and the mode set with switch of the intelligent switch setting of the intelligent module switch setting module switch setting After correcting the mismatch of modes between the master and local standby master stations reset the PLC CPU Set a correct value to switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting Standby master setting illegal Mode illegal parameter 13 13 13 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTING idonei Error details Cause of error occurrence details B401 Parameter change error Response error Transient applicable station error Receive buffer size error Data length outside of range Station number outside of range Request error Interlock signal data outside of range Request type error Transient request overload error Transient request overload error B603 Transient transmission was
402. ntemuptseting _ Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte NUM 11 5 11 5 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 1 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Hold __ Default Clear station setting Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh D Operational STOP setting Default Clear Refresh C Refresh gt Clears compulsorily Occupies 1 to 4 stations Occupies 4 stations Default Occupies 1 station Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line ff li Default Remote net Ver 1 mode LIE
403. number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1500 i Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q j Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 lg Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics v Help ls x 20 e EENE tee ela Bes Es ss osla S espe aaa 1 ale lel ziale sa PEDESTRI es S Program
404. number 1 compatible compatible remote device compat e station Petala loca station Reseved Bi pum Remote occupies 2 occupies 4 station occupies 4 X YOO to 1F station stations stations occupies stations occupies double 1 station 1 station quadruple octuple 6 5 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings twork parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 oo Window Help 1 a ppt amp 51 19 alel sel zs tod mlel ee SERES ER Program q offs sal se ale lel zit lal 2 Glee lil E B Unset project No of boards inmodule z Boards Blank no setting Ed Program Device comment J 2 B Ef Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 127 Network paral Type Master station 1 Remote pass Master station data ink type PLC parameter auto start Ij Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode Y 18 Device init All connect count 5 Remote input FiX Remote outpurfR Y Remote registerfRIwi Remote registerFlv wi 2 Remote inpulFi Ver 2 Remote outpulfBY Ver2 Remote reaister W Ver 2
405. numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote e Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0
406. o OFF 10 47 10 47 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX m perational xecutional condition Details of execution E condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data 2 4 2120 Wy Woy X x z 4 Similarly make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 4 The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to Analog output enable the first condition Set the Output range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set the HOLD CLEAR setting of channels 1 2 to CLEAR the third condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the forth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the sixth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the seventh condition Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 4 Input format HEX T Execute Operational Executional condition Details of execution
407. o SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F e Check the sequence program Is the data link stop SB0002 turned on Unable to stop data link Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the data link stop result SWO045 e Check the sequence program Is th link B g the data e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Has an error occurred Check the data link restart result SW0041 e Check the cable connection visually or with a line test Is the corresponding station disconnected e Check the parameters for local station e Check the operation status of the PLC CPU in the corresponding station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Unable to communicate from a local station remote Are there any overlap station numbers register RWw to the master station remote register RWr Unable to restart data link Do the parameters for the number of modules and The remote station local station intelligent device station information match the settings of the Check the parameters station standby master station does not start up modules that do not start up Check that the station number of the local station Check the station number setting switches and including the number of occupied stations is 65 parameter of the local station standby master or more station The local station standby master station does not
408. o Y1000 RYO1F to 1 YtotF to 1010 RYO2F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020 RYOSF to RY030 Y103F to Y1030 RYO4F to RYo4o 7 vaoaF to Y1040 RYOSF to 5 Y105F to Y1050 RYo6F to y106F to Y1060 RYO7F to RYO70 L 1070 to v1070 RXOOF to RX000 x100F to x1000 RXO1F to RX010 X101F to X1010 RXO2F to RX020 X102F to X1020 RXOSF to RX030 X103F to X1030 RXO4F to RX040 i al X104F to X1040 RXOSF to RX050 X105F to X1050 RXO6F to RX060 X106F to X1060 RXO7F to RX070 1070 to x1070 11 9 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Master station Local station Local station PLC CPU Master station PLC CPU i lt lt oO ojojojojojojojoj jojolj oj ojo olo ecjojojojojojojojojojojoj ojo oi jo ee i O 8 8 8 8 8 8 s szizzz s s s i2 5 2 I i Sislgisisisisisisigis sigiaieis 2 23 2 2 3 2 8 2 8 8 9 S 2
409. ocal station Local station station occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Remote station Remote station occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations Remote station occupies 2 stations V The station does not become data link faulty Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station Master occupies occupies station 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Remote station occupies 1 station Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations R If a remote station a local station an intelligent device station or the standby master station that is set as an error invalid station is specified as a reserved station the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting function If errors are generated at all the stations when they are set as error invalid stations the ERR LED will light Setting method Set the error invalid station setting function in Station information setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchronous function This function selects whether or not the link scan should be synchronized with the
410. occurs in a remote device station When a communication error power off etc occurs in a local station The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting Clears the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote station with a communication error Clears the receive area from the remote device station with a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote device station with a communication error Clears the receive area from the local station with a communication error Retains the receive area from the local station with a communication error Undefined Continues operation of Continue areas other than the remote I O station Retains the receive area from the remote Continue Continue device station witha communication error Retains the receive area Continue Continue from idi oca station with a communication error Undefined Continues operation of areas other than the remote I O station Continue Not affected by the communication status of the remote device station Continue Not affected by the communication status of the local station All poin
411. ock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the writing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code 51 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 Access code S1 2 f Set 0004H 0004H User Attribute code Buffer memor x S1 3 4 Specify the buffer memory start address p User address Number of points x2 81 4 white Specify the write data count in word units 1 to 480 User App 18 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the intelligent device station to which data will be written 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter Interlock signal storage devices Set data bi5 to b8b7 to RY Request device 0 to 127 S3 0 0 RY Set the upper 8 bits to 0 0 Us Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to 08 07 to ae RWr 1 RX Error code storage devic
412. of read write points to within the setting range Change the station number to within the setting range Check the sequence program Change the setting of the interlock signal storage device to within the setting range Check the contents of the request as well as the target ile and then send the ransient overload ile and then send the ransient overload Wait a while and then retransmit Wait a while and then retransmit There is an error in the target station s B607 arget station CPU error CPU i 9 Check the target CPU ransient request overload error The target station was not an intelligent B774 Transient request error 9 9 device station B778 Response time out B780 Module mode setting error Station number specification error B783 Transient storage buffer error An access code that does not exist was B803 Dati points tror The number of data points were out of Set the number of data points P range to within 1 to 960 bytes 13 14 There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station A response was not received from the requested station A transient transmission was executed even though the target station was set to the I O mode The transmission destination and source stations were the same when other station connection was specified An error occurred in the transient storage buffer when a transient transmission of greater than 1 was being performed Wait a w
413. of station No 5 turns on 4 When X21 of the local station of station No 5 is turned on Y41 of the master station turns on station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 Hm Bon Eco Ver xy e local station station number 1 Occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 Occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 45 11 45 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS The communication method between the master station and intelligent device stations is different for each intelligent device station For more details on the communication between the master station and intelligent device stations see the manual for each intelligent device station 12 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System and lists the check items and procedures for each of the possible problems 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence The following lists the details of the check items and procedures for each problem occurrence Description of problem Check item Check procedure e Check the c
414. of host occupied stations occupied station Indicates the switch setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SWO06A Indicates the parameter setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SW0068 Indicates the host data link operation status OFF Being executed ON Not executed Indicates the data link status OFF Data link control by the master station ON Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present OFF Not present ON Present Indicates the scan mode setting information OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when the CPU is down OFF Stop ON Continue Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0078 to SW007B Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting OFF No setting ON Setting exists information is stored in SW007C to SW007F Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station OFF Reception complete ON Reception not complete Detects changes to the host setting switch during data linking OFF No changes de
415. old input data single x r of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 E r Data link disorder station setting 1 r Expanded cyclic setting single x r of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name r Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 m Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting T Hold input data L Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Setthe number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occup
416. on Status at Error OCCUFTOTICO c eds eet dp m Oe LX ER ER RET HR re Foe cep X NY Eae Rn ege d 5 44 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence 5 44 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence 5 45 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link 6 1 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter 6 1 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer 6 2 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction 6 2 6 2 Parameter Setting 6 3 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 6 5 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings ssssssseeeeneenennenenee nennen 6 5 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings sen 6 10 6 3 3 Local station network parameter settings sss nennen 6 12 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter se
417. on Ver 2 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Expanded cyclic setting When station type is ver 1 compatible station single cannot be changed When station type is ver 2 compatible station single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Remote station points When station type is ver 1 remote I O station 0 points reserve station 8 points 8points 8points reserved 16 points 32 points When station type is other than ver 1 remote station 0 points reserve station n points n Calculated automatically by GX Developer according to the number of occupied stations and expansion cyclic setting Refer to Section 3 1 for the number of points Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the system configuration specified in Section 6 4 Expanded Exclusive station Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 4 Btation Station type cyclic setting count points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Ver TRemote 1 0 station single Exclusive
418. on is executed the transient data length is greater than the communication buffer Size of the corresponding station The corresponding station that is being tested stopped communication during line test 1 B903 Transient request error Communication buffer size setting error Transient data length error BA19 Corresponding station error BA1B of the module is other than 0 to 64 Alternatively the last station number is greater than 64 Station number setting error Multiple master stations exist on the same line Alternatively line noise was detected at power on Master station overlapping error Hardware error detection A hardware error was detected Transient request overload error the corresponding station BFFE 13 15 Alternatively transient transmission was performed even though the target station does not support transient transmission when the target station was set to the l O Set to the intelli mode There are too many transient requests to Review the attribute definition Check the designation of the target station number as well as the function version and software version of the target local station Set the range to within 1 to 100 when writing and 1 to 160 when reading Set the address to a multiple of 16 when accessing the bit device Set so that the number of processing points does not exceed the device range File register capacity setting The file register capacity
419. on is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw remote device station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the data for the remote device station is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan
420. on items relating to programming 8 1 Precautions on Programming The following explains precautions on the creation of a program Create a program that allows the detection of data link status and interlocking with the remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station In addition create an error handling program Program example Set the Special Relay SB Refresh Device to SBO and the Special Register SW Refresh Device to SWO of the master station with GX Developer When setting the refresh devices of the special relay SB and the special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not duplicate with device numbers on the MELSECNET H network Module error Module ready Host data link status SW80 to SW83 Other station data link status X nO XnF Xni pH H H sw amp o 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 2 I O Signals for the PLC CPU This section explains the input output signals for the PLC CPU of the master local module 8 2 1 I O signal list Table 8 1 shows a list of the I O signals The n in the table indicates the master local module s first number which is determined by both the installation position and the module installed before the master local module Example When the master local module s first I O number is X Y30 Xn0 to X n 1 F gt X30 to X4F YnO to Y n 1 F gt
421. ontrol of the PLC in operation changing data by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module or connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Before performing other controls of the PLC in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote PC from an external device troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program DESIGN PRECAUTION 4 DANGER Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not output the prohibited to use signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause system malfunction in the PLC e To specify the automatic refresh parameter specify Y for the remote output RY refresh device If a value other than Y for example M or L is specified the status of the device will remain as it was prior to
422. ores the station numbers of the remote I O stations set as 16 16 point remote points in the remote I O station points setting 1 2 l O station setting Default value 0 no setting Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on Stores the station numbers of the reserved stations set to 0 points 1 Default value 0 no setting 0 points reserve D8 to DBs 216 to 219 P station setting Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on x1 Used in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode x2 When the setting is 8 points 8 points reserved the station numbers are stored into both the 8 point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting 2 Remote input RX and remote output RY Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored Two words are used per station 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored Two words are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the m
423. ote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX MEI Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list ed mulieres 3 s5 ER ER EB 29 le eae dens s aE5 css cert MRIS FAG No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting B rr oT Unset project 1 8 Program E 9 E Device comment 1 2 3 2 13 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 19 PLC paramete Operational Operational settings 2 Network parar Local station v 2 Remote pass Master station data link type Device memory Remote net Ver 1 mode 7 E Device init connect count Remote X1000 Remote output R Y 1000 Remote reaister Awr wa Remote register ww W100 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register wi Ver 2 Remote registerE wW w Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry count
424. overall distance and distance between stations 13 1 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTING From previous page From previous page Is the SD LED lit flashing Are the station umber switches set properly Are there any station numbers that are completely matched 3 Y Corresponding module malfunction station number switch x2 Incomplete match Occupies 2 ___ stations or more Station Station number n number n 1 Or Station sera number number m met Occupies 1 station or more 3 Complete match Occupies 1 station or more Station Station number number n n3 i Station numberm number m 1 Occupies 1 station or more From previous page Is the transmission rate setting correct Y Y Set the correct transmission rate v Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Is the communication cable wired properly 1 Y Wire the communication cable properly Corresponding module malfunction baud rate switch Set the correct station numbers Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch The master station already exists Reset the module to operate as the standby master station Occupies 1 station or more Station Station number number n nac Station Station number number m met Occupies 2 stations or more gt 13 MELSEC Q 13 TROUB
425. owing conditions must all be satisfied a2 a4 a8 a The total number of ver 1 compatible slave 2 b 62 b4 b8 2 stations that occupy 1 station and ver 2 Condition 1 ere we compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Single d d2 04 d8 X 4 lt 64 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave X 32 a2 X 32 a4 X 64 a8 X 128 stations that occupy 2 stations and ver 2 b X 64 b2 96 b4 192 b8 384 compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations Condition 2 6 X 96 c2 x 160 c4 x 320 c8 x 640 which are set to Single c The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Single d The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Single X 128 d2 224 d4 X 448 d8 896 lt 8192 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that X 4 a2 X 8 a4 X 16 a8 x 32 occupy 4 stations which are set to Double b X 8 b2 X
426. own below AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 0n O Off 24 V DC is being supplied b D Module is normal s e The data link is being performed normally D 10 36 10 36 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 2 Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN and confirm that the voltages converted from digital to analog are output 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D500 D501 CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value 2 D A conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN D510 CH1 Digital value setting D511 CH2 Digital value setting Master station Y Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11 mn Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 37 10 37 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used 10 3 1 Conf
427. oy K100 71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word moy KO 72 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14u for station No 20 App 37 App 37 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Parameter registration data link startup M300 14834 GP RLPASET uo DO D10 D50 D60 D70 301 Dedicated instruction RLPASET Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 181 N300 Turn the parameter setting instruction off SB3 1 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction M310 Instruct to start the control program at normal completion M302 Performs abnormal of the RLPASET instruction completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter edd ion SB6E SB2 Instruct to stop data link SB45 3 219 RST SB2 1 Turn the data link stop instruction off RST SB3 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45 222M SET M303 1 Instruct to change parameters RLPASET instruction Control data N303 224 Mov KO D100 Clear complete status 4 Slave station setting data send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid Mov K3 D102 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Mov K9 D101 Mov K3 0103 Number of retries 3 times mov 0104 1 Number of automatic return modules 1 modu
428. parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special regist
429. perational setting Operational settings 29 Network parar Type Master station pm 27 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto stat 18 Device memory Mode Remote 1 0 net mode I JR Device init connect count 5 Remote inpuFX Remote outputfRY Remote reaisterfAW Remote reste Ww Ver 2 Remote inpul EX Ver2 Remote outputfAY Ver2 Remote registerfR Wi Vet2 Remote register Wwi Special relayfSB Special registeifSw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop z E Scan mode setting Asynchronous E Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settings Indispensable setngs setting Akeadyset Setifitisneeded No seting Akeady set E S oa Ready Host station Ovivnte INUM Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational set
430. put obs RX Automatic refresh Link scan y Remote output Output RY 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU 2 Remote device station communication MELSEC Q Signals for handshaking with the remote device station initial request error occurred flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr see Section 4 2 2 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Master station Remote input RX Link scan Automatic refresh Remote output RY Link scan Automatic refresh Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Link scan Link scan Remote device station Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWw Remote register RWr A Voltmeter 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU PLC CPU 3 Local station communication Communication between the master station and the local station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 3 a Cyclic transmission Data communication between the PLC CPUS can be performed in N N mode using bit data remote input RX and remote output RY and word data remote registers RWw and RWr Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
431. r 2 mode or remote net additional mode allows RX RY to be increased to up to 8192 points and RWr RWw to up to 2048 words per network by making expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple octuple Also RX RY can be increased to up to 224 points and RWr RWw to up to 32 words per station See Section 4 4 14 24 Remote I O station points setting Set the number of I O points of a remote I O station This setting minimizes CPU device assignment and reduces the reserved points of remote input RX and remote output RX for remote I O stations See Section 4 4 13 25 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP Set whether output data to the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU comes to STOP See Section 4 3 5 1 12 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The system configuration for the CC Link is described below 2 1 System Configuration 1 Remote net ver 1 mode 2 A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the following conditions must all be satisfied a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations d Number of modules occupying 4 stations A Number of remote I O stat
432. r ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 11 3 11 3 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 R Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 1 modules Default 1 station count Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Stop gt continue Scan mode setting Asynehrongus synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified Number of occupied stations Re serva invalid Intelligent buffer select word station select Remote station points Expanded Station type cyclic setting Send Receive Automatic Occupies Intelligent device station 4 stations single 128 points b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 188 Project Edit fiew Online E a n gj S fe suing tle regen eae No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program 9 a Device comment 1 2 3 Em Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 18 PLC paramete Operational settinc Operational settings 2 Network parar Type Master station v 2 R
433. range gt STATION NO Master station 0 Local station 1t064 Standby master station 1 to 64 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set the ERR LED lights up MST and S MST LED indicator lamp status and station types Operation status Type of station set Operating as a master station Operating as a standby master controlling data link station standing by Master station MST OSMST MSTO SMST Standby master station MST O SMST MSTO SMST Localstaion O On Off 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q Transmission rate mode setting Set the transmission rate and operating conditions for the module switch settings at time of shipment 0 Number Transmission rate 2 5 Mbps see Section 7 7 2 Line test see Section 7 8 e Transmissionrate 625 kbps When the station number setting switch is set to 0 Line test 1 8 Transmission rate 5 Mbps When the station number setting Transmissionrate 10 Mbps Switch is set to 1 to 64 Line test 2 B Transmission rate 625 kbps NC Ue see Section 7 4 D Transmission rate 5 Mbps Connect the CC Link dedicated cable for data linking For the connection method see Section 7 5 Terminals SLD and FG are connected inside the module Since a 2 piece type terminal block is used the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block Replace the module after turning i
434. range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Device name Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of d P Within the range of the reading Bit specified device D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion P The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by Pd the status when the instruction is complete 0 Completion status No error normal completion System m than 0 Error code lli Station number Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent 0 to 64 User device station Pocos Cond See 1 and 2 User Attribute code ple Access code Attribute code Pune Emar Specify the buffer memory start address or device start xd address or device User number number 2 Number of points 1 to 480 PEE Specify the read data count in word units 11032 User App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which data will be read When the random access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read
435. ransmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device station Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote register RWw 1 1 1 Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc RWwO E 1 RWw1 aud Rwa E 1 RWw3 Remote register RWw RWw4 Numeric data for ae 7 eae i averaging processing i setting A D conversion i RWw6 enable disable setting pen Zu bi 1 RWwO RWwi sid 1 1 qp d4 1 RWw2 RWw3 9 n RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 po 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ae m E ime im imm imm mem m mcm mm mcm mmm ee al Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT 64AD is set to station number 1 Address RWwO RWwi RWw RWwa RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 A D conversion enable disable setting RWw
436. rating as a local station availability is identical to that of a local station Table 8 6 Link special register list 1 8 Availability mT Available x Not available Number Description Oni nlin one Offline Master station Local station Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are specified Multiple temporary 00 Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to SW9003 error invalid station SW0007 6034 UE 01 to 64 Specifies a single station from 1 to 64 specification The specified number indicates the station number of a temporary error invalid station Specifies a temporary error invalid station 0 Not specified as a temporary error invalid station 1 Specified as a temporary error invalid station SWo004 6044 SW0005 b15 014 6013 b12 6054 error 91 0004 invalid station SW0005 SW0006 specification 3 6069 SW0006 SW0007 SW0007 6074 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the station for which line tests are executed SWO0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed for all stations 6084 setting 01 to 64 Specified station only Default value 0 Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used Default value 1 SWo009 Monitoring time 10 609 settin Setting range 0 to 360 seconds 9 The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value ou
437. re written into RWwO0 to RWw3 Y1000 to Y105F are written into RYO00 to RY5F SB0000 to SBOOSF are refreshed SW0000 to SWOOSF are refreshed 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK This chapter explains the procedure from the module installation to the data link startup 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link The following describes the procedure from the module installation to the CC Link data link startup Start Mount the master module local module and standby master module on the base unit Mount the remote modules on the control board pee i Check the master module local module and standby master module individually to see if See Section 7 4 they operate normally hardware test Connect the modules with the CC Link dedicated cable Connect a terminal resistor that matches See Section 7 5 the cable type to the modules located at both ends Check items prior to turning power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP 7 Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the middle position Set the switches on the master module local module and standby master module see Sections 7 3 and 7 7 Station number setting see Section 7 7 1 Transmission rate mode setting see Section 7 7 2 Turn the power
438. red in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station XOF to X00 X1F to X10 Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is output automatically for each link scan to remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 3 Station number 4 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station RY7FF to YOF to YOO i to Y10 e When setting the automatic refresh parameters it is recommended to specify Y as the remote output RY refresh device If any device other than Y e g M or L is specified parameter setting must be made to compulsorily clear the device status at a CPU STOP If parameter setting is not made the device status before a STOP is retained as is For slave station compulsory clear in case of CPU STOP see Section 4 3 5 For the method to stop a data link see Section 4 4 10 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and the remote device stations
439. register RWr Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw Address 1E0n 1 1 For station 1E2 number 1 1 1 4 1 5 For station 1E6 Number 2 1 7 1 8 1 9 For station 1EA number 3 1 1 1EDu For station 1EE number 4 1 1FO0u 1 1 For station 1F2 number 5 1F3u to 2DC 200 For station 2DE number 64 2DFu T i 8 15 8 PROGRAMMING Buffer memory number address 2 0 to 2 2E4u to 2 7 2E8H to 2 4 2 2EFH 2FOH to 2 6 oF auto 2F7H 2 8 to 2 2 to 2 9 3004103034 3044 to 307 3084 to 30CH to 30FH 310 to 313H Station Buffer memory address 1 0 to 1 1 4 1 7 1 8 1 1 to 1EFH 1FOH to 1 1F4H to 1 7 1 8 to 1 1 1 200 to 203 204 207 208 to 20BH 20CH to 20 210H to 213H number 38 EA o MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 314u to 317H 15 318H to 31BH 16 31CH to 31FH 17 320H to 323H 18 324H to 327H 19 328 to 32BH 20 32CH to 32FH 21 330H to 333H 22 334H to 337H 23 338H to
440. register S Ww Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting z Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset E Ready 1002 Host station Ove NUM 2 Setthe network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Setthe station type using Type Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 Parameter name Number of exclusive stations ICC LinkL Exclusive station r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r of CPU STOP sett
441. remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Setthe refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below _ series GX RAM Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Bg t po Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 8 8 Program Device comment Parameter Start 1 0 No s PLC paramete Operational settin 2 Network E Remote pass Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register R wr Remote registe Fi ww Ver 2 Remote input FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register E Wr Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode settine Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial _Interrupt setting EI ___Interrupt settings 1 9 HB Operational settings Local station EL Device memory Device init
442. requests to other stations 2 The conditions setting switches for AJ61QBT11 shown below cannot be used on QJ61BT11N Use the GX Developer and set the CC Link network parameters Setting Description SW1 Station type Input status of data link error station Number of occupied stations Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N 1 When the remote net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used use the remote net ver 1 mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing 2 When the remote I O net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used use the remote I O net mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing 3 When the remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode is set to the master station of the QJ61BT11 an error error code B399 B983 B984 occurs cod EET Error Xe Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station The number of connected modules Number of connected parameter was set to a value other than 1 to 64 modules setting error The remote net ver 2 mode remote parameter d et to the remote net ver 1 net additional mode has been set to mode remote I O net mode et a value within the range from 1 to 64 the master station of the QJ61BT11 The remote net ver 2 mode remote hip the remote n t ver B983 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to mode remote VO net mode the master station of the QJ61BT11 The remote net ver 2 mode re
443. rforming data station link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote e Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory of the local station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match 51 0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO09C to SWOO9F e Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory of the local station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Unabl
444. rlapping numbers of number of occupied stations and whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system 1 Number of occupied station number overlap checking Checks whether or not occupied station numbers duplicate Example Local station station number 1 Station Station Station Station number of occupied stations 4 number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 Duplicate Hh Remote device station station number 4 number of occupied stations 2 Station Station number 4 number 5 1 When there is an duplicate the ERR LED flashes and the duplicate status is stored SW0098 to SW009B Station number overlap status 2 Evenif an overlap exists the data link continues with the remaining normally functioning stations 3 By correcting the switch setting to normal and resetting the PLC CPU of the master station the ERR LED is turned off and the data SW0098 to SWO009B can be cleared However if the starting station number overlaps it is excluded from the overlap checking Example Local station station number 1 number of occupied stations 4 Station Station Station Station Station Station number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 number 6 Duplicate 4 5 Remote device station station number 1 number of occupied stations 2 Station Station number 1 number 2 Check
445. rming the parameter setting with the dedicated instructions Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Q00JCPU QOOCPU Maximum 2 Q01CPU Q02CPU It can be Maximum 4 CPU QO02HCPU mounted only module QO6HCPU Maximum 64 with the Q Q12HCPU Tog Q25HCPU 12PHCPU 2 Maximum 64 1 3 Q25PHCPU x1 See User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module to use 2 Incompatible with the remote net additional mode When the module is used operation cannot be guaranteed 3 For use in the remote net additional mode use the PLC CPU whose first five digits of serial No are 05032 or later If the incompatible PLC CPU is used operation cannot be guaranteed 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Mountable base unit QJ61BT11N can be mounted on any of the base units I O slots 4 However depending on combinations with other mounted modules and the number of mountings there may be cases where the power capacity is insufficient Be sure to consider the power capacity when mounting the module x4 Must be inside the point number range of 1 CPU unit and network module for remote I O station 3 Applicable software package The software package available for the QJ61BT11N is listed below Manual name Model name Remarks Required MELSEC PLC 5 programming software GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW E n in the model name is 4 or greater 5 The product of Version 8 03D or later is r
446. rranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused
447. rved station specifications are made for the same station App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Set data Setting range Setby Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient Setting for 1 to 26 7 modules transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations Send buffer size Receive buffer size Automatic refresh buffer size Send buffer size Receive buffer size Automatic refresh buffer size Settings for the first module Settings for the 26th module The default parameter settings are send buffer size 401 receive buffer size 40h automatic refresh buffer size 80x Send receive buffer E no setting 40n to 10004 0 word no setting 64 to 4096 words Automatic refresh buffer no setting 80 to 10001 0 word no setting 128 to 4096 words 7 Perform the settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting data starting from the smallest station number x8 Keep the total size of the send and receive buffer sizes at 1000u 4096 words or less Specify the size of data to be sent and received plus 7 words for the send and receive buffer sizes respectively x9 Keep the total size of the automatic refresh buffer sizes at 10001 4096 words or less App 33 Specify the necessary automati
448. s b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw remote device station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the data for the remote device station is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 3 1 1 5 33 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X
449. s Number of automatic return modules Standby master station number PU down specification _ Data link stop when a master station CPU error occurs can mode setting Asynchronous Delay time setting Delay time is not specified 1 module No standby master station specified 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q Content of buffer memory size specification for intelligent device station Send buffer Receive buffer Automatic update buffer 128 words 1 Perform an automatic CC Link startup in the remote net ver 1 mode 2 If an automatic CC Link startup is performed on a system that includes a local station the local station will occupy one station during operation 3 Make sure to perform line tests for all stations if an automatic CC Link startup is performed and changes such as replacement of a module etc are made to the System during data link operation Stations whose data link has already been established only stations whose station numbers overlap may also go down if stations with overlapping head station numbers return to the system If an automatic CC Link startup was performed a temporary error invalid station cannot be used In case of a multiple PLC system where each CPU controls several QJ61BT11N modules the automatic CC Link startup is performed on the QJ61BT11N that has the smallest head I O number 2 Execution conditions a When the parameters are not set the automatic CC Link startup function is appli
450. s of RX of station No 4 Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 40184 are the corresponding size of RX of station No 4 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RX size Station No 1 RY offset Head buffer memory address of RY of station No 1 Station No 1 RY size 24 184 384 number of RY points 16 24 words Station No 2 RY offset 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 2 RY size 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 3 RY offset 4218 Head buffer memory address of RY of station No 3 Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory add 4218 th i ize of Station No 3 RY size 1 4 g ry address are the corresponding size RY of station No 3 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RY offset 4218 Head buffer memory address of RY of station No 4 Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 42184 are the corresponding size of RY of station No 4 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RY size 1 189 Station No 1 RWw offset 440 Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No 1 2 number of occupied stations 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 4 RWw size 0 default Buffer memory size of RWw of station No 4 Station No 1 RWr offset 4 00 Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No 1
451. s section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Tean Operational disorder Default Clear Hold Cclear gt station setting settings Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh D STOP setting Default Refresh C Refresh Clears compulsorily Master station Mater station Master station Duplex function Master station Duplex function Local station Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode iis 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 2 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Devi f Y M L B T T D W Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR ee Cert
452. s the line test 1 line test 2 result swoops i 6B8 Line test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 7 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 8 37 8 37 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 8 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Offline Master station Local station Number Description Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC Link ver 2 SW0140 0 Ver 1compatible slave station 7404 1 Ver 2compatible slave station Swot b15 b14 6012 7414 Compatible Se Link swo140 16 15 14 13 r information swo142 ver informatio swoi4i 32 31 29 742 SWo0142 48 47 46 45 SW0133 SW0143 7434 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the CC Link version matching status of the parameters and Slave stations 0 Normal 1 Matching error SWO0144 Example of matching error 7449 Installation Parameter SW0145 Ver 2compatible remote Ver 1compatible remote Gay joe device station device station installation parameter Ver 1compatible remote Ver 2compatible remote 51 0146 matching status 7 device station device station 7461 b15 614 b12 to b3 b2 bl SW0147 SWO014
453. sable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitismeeded setting Ready Q02H Host station Ove SCRL 11 37 11 37 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Input data hold clear Hol Cclear gt Default Clear ae Occupies 1 to 4 stations Default Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations single double quadruple octuple cyclic setting Default single Goune Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line Remote I O net mode Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All Remote input RX Bic name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR d Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR d Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR d Ver 2 Remot
454. scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 72 x 1 13 0 5 5 X 12 1 x 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 x 4 067 SM ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant lig p v 2 SM Master station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link x1 Round up below the decimal point DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME MELSEC Q Example When the PLC CPU type is QOGHCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Lnik OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 x 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 5 3 2 Local station lt local station MELSEC Q 1 Local station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is executed by one local station until a response from another local station is received Express Maximum a RIRD OT ion value instruction LS X BC read points 16 16 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time LS QnCP
455. served invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the system configuration specified in Section 6 5 CC Link station information Module 1 x Expanded Exclusive station Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 4 Btation Station type cyclic setting count points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Ver TRemote 1 0 station x single Exclusive station 1 32 points v No setting X 2 2 __ Ver 1Remote device station v single Exclusive station 2 64 points No setting 3 4 Ver2lnteliigent device station double Exclusive station 4 224 points v No setting x 64 B4 128 4 8 Ver2Remote device station v quadruple Exclusive station 64 points v Reserve station 5 9 Ver2lnteliigent device station octuple Exclusive station 4 896 points v No setting T 64 64 128 v Default End Cancel 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station number 4 First module station number 4 Intelligent device station y Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Send buffer
456. setting Is the correct master station parameter information Unable to receive input from a remote I O station area being used CPU built in parameters default parameter information SW0067 parameters e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 13 1 13 1 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure 13 Unable to receive input from a remote I O station Unable to output data from a remote I O station Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote device station 13 2 Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Is the corresponding remote I O station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory Is the master station parameter information area being used CPU built in internal parameters default parameters correct Is the corresponding remote I O station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overl
457. setting so that the maximum Remote net additional mode compatible slave stations is greater than station number of ver 1 station number illegal the minimum station number of ver 2 compatible slave stations is compatible slave stations in the network less than the minimum station parameter setting number of ver 2 compatible slave stations Specify the standby master station as an intelligent device station Change the mode to the remote net ver 2 mode Make 8 16 points setting for the same remote I O station Model illegal has occurred between the master and local standby master stations e The mode differs between the master and standby master stations Mode illegal between master The local station is set to the remote and local standby master net additional mode and the master stations station is set to other than the remote net additional mode e The local station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode and the master station is in the remote net ver 1 mode Atthe time of parameter setting with dedicated instruction an illegal value has been set to switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting At the time of parameter setting with Remote I O net mode station dedicated instruction the station type of Set all station types to the type illegal other than the remote I O station has remote station been set in the remote I O net mode The assignme
458. sh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc PARAMETER SETTIN SEES MELSEC Q 6 7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction This section explains the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operational Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 1 Master Local Station number 2 Station number 3 station NN station occupies Remote I O station Remote yo station X YOO to 1F Error invalid station Reserved station 1 station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station L POINT Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in module setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 PLC parame
459. shown below Status confirmation of AJO5BVBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X0 XOF xi SW80 0 0 4 mc No M100 SW80 3 NO M100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting X1018 1000 MOVP H31 1001 MOVP H200 1003 WP 1005 Y1018 SET Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting change Initial setting change AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting processing X1018 88 HMT RST Y1018 X1019 3 122 RST Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting X1078 124 HOFC W1014 H31 W1015 MOVP HO W1017 SET Y1078 SET 1079 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed To the next page 10 30 2 J AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data Average processing setting requ
460. sing Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Additional mode h Setthe total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified I Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop m Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous
461. sing processing processing F I Refresh stop Refresh start Data link stop Host data link status X01 lt Data link start RLPASET instruction completion Refresh instruction SB03 Data link stop SB02 Data link stop complete SB45 RLPASET instruction Direction device Complete device E Status display device E Abnormal completion at completion END processing processing processing Sequence program T v When all the stations are faulty END END END END END END processing processing processing processing Refresh stop Refresh start Data link stop gt Host data link status X01 Return to system processing RLPASET instruction completion Refresh instruction 5803 Data link stop 5802 Ed Data link stop complete SB45 RLPASET instruction Direction device Complete device Status display device Abnormal at completion App 35 Return to system App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Operation error In the following cased an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Description of operation error 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module
462. specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and
463. st and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN Controlling data link I MST SMST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR O O LERR b LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on o otf Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed uM eds normally RUN LRUN MST O O SMST SD RO Sending data ERR LERR 11 12 11 12 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station turns on 2 When X21 of the local station is turned on Y40 of the master station turns on Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor ocal station station number 1 occupies 4 stations
464. station OFF Data link is stopped ON Data linking in progress Other station data link status Xn3 This signal indicates the data link status of other stations remote local intelligent device and standby master stations The SB0080 signal has the same contents OFF All stations normal ON There is a faulty station the faulty station status is stored in SWO0080 to SW0083 Module ready XnF This signal indicates whether the module is ready to operate a When the module reaches ready to operate status this signal turns ON automatically b This signal turns OFF when either of the following conditions occurs 1 When an error is detected in the switch setting status for the module 2 When the module error signal XnO turns ON Power ON Module ready XnF Module error Xn0 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 3 Buffer Memory The buffer memory transfers data between the master local module and the PLC CPU The reading and writing of data are performed by parameter settings or with dedicated instructions using the GX Developer The contents of the buffer memory return to the default when the power is turned OFF or the PLC CPU is reset 8 3 1 Buffer memory list The buffer memory list is shown in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 1 3 are Read write Availablity Reference Description a ES Local Decimal possibility section ES station Section Stores the parameter settings Read only 832 1
465. station cable length of Version 1 00 2 Definition of Ver 2 As Ver 2 is characterized as increase of cyclic transmission data size Ver 2 compatible module is defined to support this function 3 Checking version The modules including CC Link logo on the rated plate are compatible with Ver 1 10 The modules including V2 logo on the rated plate are compatible with Ver 2 MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL SERIAL 050320000000000 B 80M1 IND CONT EQ c UL us usten C MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This section describes the specifications of the QJ61BT11N For the general specifications of the QJ61BT11N refer to the user s manual for the CPU module to be used 3 1 Performance Specifications Table 3 1 lists the performance specifications of the OJ61BT 11N Table 3 1 Performance specifications Maximum overall cable distance Maximum transmission distance Maximum number of connected stations 64 See Section 2 1 master station Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 stations local station The number of stations can be switched using the GX Developer parameter setting 1 Remote I O RX RY 2048 points Maximum number of link points per system Remote register RWw 256 points master Saon remote device Srnec station intelligent xd device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote device station loca
466. station 1_ 32 points v No setting 2 2 Ver2Remote device station v quadruple Exclusive station 2 192 points Y No setting E 3 4 Ver2lntelligent device station double Exclusive station 4 224 points v No setting T 64 64 128 4 8 Ver 1Remate 1 0 station x single Exclusive station 1 32 points Reserve station v 5 9 Ver 1inteligent device station singe v Exclusive station 4 128 points No setting 64 64 1287 Default End Cancel 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Send buffer First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Receive buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Send buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Receive buffer First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list
467. station data link type Mode All connect count Remote input AX Remote output RAY Remote register Awr Remote register E ww Ver 2 Remote input Rx Ver 2 Remote output R Ver 2 Remote reaister R w Ver 2 Remote register E ww Special relay SB Special register S W Retry count Automatic reconnection station c Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt setting Remote device station initial setting Operational settings 1000 wo E HIINSESESNEUET YU NE SS swo ount 1 ma 1 1 rj Asynchronous Y _ c Parameter settings of the standby master station Start 1 0 No Operational setting Type Master station data link type Mode All connect count Remote input RX Remote output AY Remote register Rwr Remote register F ww Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output AY Ver 2 Remote registerfE wr Ver 2 Remote register F ww Special relay SB Special register Sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station c Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt settina Remote device station initial setting Operational _ settings Stand by master station Y ia vn Remote net Ver 1 mode Y aurei qe ue mi 1000 1000 wo ount Interrupt settinas 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q d Program exampl
468. stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 7 Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic cop nication Standby master station returns to normal mode and system operation Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby LA N Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used The following shows an overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used a When the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Standby master station standby Station number 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote I O station input RX output RY Station number 2 pes codecs i Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 b X00to XOF ursi ML eee eS X00 to XOF Y00 to YOF Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master station sho
469. ster station Remote Remote Remote I O station I O station station 1 occupies 1 station BT 0 8 ST 200 ni X 10 3 gt 8 200 3 10 N 3 230 ni 3 LS 0 8 27 8 4 8 3 30 3 4 8 230 365 84 s 0 37 ms ROCESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 Transmission Delay Time This section explains the transmission delay time the time until data is transmitted 5 2 1 Master station lt remote I O station 1 Master station RX remote I O station input This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote I O station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O
470. ster station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link Input data hold clear Tean Operational disorder Default Clear Hold Cclear gt station setting settings Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily C Refresh D STOP setting Default Refresh C Refresh Clears compulsorily Master station Mater station Master station Duplex function Master station Duplex function Local station Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode vite 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 1 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Devi f Y M L B T T D W Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR ee Cert R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register Pe emer eee Er RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB o
471. ster station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous TT Scan mode setting Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program Device comment i Parameter Start 1 0 No si PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Local station E Remote pass Master station data link type EL Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wr Remote registerF ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register R wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set E Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 20 11 20 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATI
472. t Yn6 and Yn8 cannot instructions parameters Remote device station initialization procedure registration function Not supported Not supported Supported Supported Parameter settings using dedicated Supported Supported Supported Not supported instruction Parameter settings c Supported Supported Not supported Supported using GX Developer Standby master The master station that The master station that The master station that The master station that function is down can recover is down can recover is down cannot recover is down cannot recover Event issuance for the Supported Supported Not supported Not supported interrupt program Parameter verification a test E PROM o CPU parameters No CPU parameters Expanded cyclic setting App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N 1 The following dedicated instructions for AJ61QBT11 cannot be used in QJ61BT11N CCL CCLEND Performs mail box registration for intelligent device and remote device instructions SPCCLR Performs interrupt command to intelligent device instruction SPCBUSY Reads remote station status Sends data message to designated transmission destination station QnACPU RECV Reads data message that has been sent by SEND instruction READ SREAD Designated station QnACPU word device data read by local station data MERE Sends and executes transient such as remote RUN STOP
473. t be used as a device for setting data x When the setting data for S2 to S5 are not to be set specify a dummy device App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Control data Set data Setting range Setby Stores the status when the instruction is complete 51 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code Specifies whether the individual setting data from S2 to S5 is valid or invalid 0 Invalid 1 Valid BRUN EORR b14b13 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO RE EG RE to 0 L Slave station setting data S2 Reserved station specification data 51 1 Setting flag S3 Error invalid station specification data S4 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data S5 Mode 00 Remote net Ver 1 mode 01 Remote net Additional mode 10 Remote net Ver 2 mode 11 Not used Number of connected modules 7 Sets the number of connected slave stations involved in communication S1 3 Number of retries Sets the number of retries to a communication faulty station Number of Sets the number of slave stations that can be returned per one link scan automatic return modules Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC Operation CPU error occurs 81 5 specification when 0 Stop CPU is down 1 1 Continue Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for Scan mode sequence scan specification 0 Asynchronous 1 Syn
474. t complete i ON Complete Remote davies station Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO005F initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB ae 7 oF instruction result Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 2 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 29 10 29 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference MELSEC Q For reference an example setting performed with the sequence program is
475. t the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 46 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data t
476. t to the remote net ver 1 mode the local station is Set to the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode When the master station is set to the remote net ver 2 mode the local station is Set to remote net additional mode 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions This section explains the transient transmission functions 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions The following dedicated instructions can be used for transient transmission 2 Reference Applicable station Instruction Description section Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified Appendix station or a PLC CPU device of a specified 21 Master station station Local station Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified SEU station or a PLC CPU device of a specified station station 2 1 station 2 2 Automatically performs a handshake with the d Appendix specified station and reads data from that station s 23 Intelligent device buffer memory station Automatically performs a handshake with the f RISEND specified station and writes data to that station s buffer memory IND Specified station 2 5 specified station 2 6 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME This chapter explains the data link processing time such as the link scan time and transmission delay time 5 1 Link Scan Time This section explains the CC Link scan
477. tandby master station Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station 0 No standby master station 1 Standby master station exists Indicates whether the Type setting in the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master station OFF Operates as a master station controlling data link ON Operates as a standby master station standby Link special registers SW The following describes the link special registers SW relating to the standby master function The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses Table 4 6 List of link special registers relating to the standby master function SW0043 6434 SW005D 65D Refresh instruction at standby master switching result Forced master switching instruction result Applicability Applicable x Not applicable Master Offline station Local station Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master switching 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 SW0073 Standby master station Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 nu
478. tation occupies 1 station station number 1 1 mov H102 D11 Second Remote I O station m occupies 1 station station number 2 mov H103 D12 1 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station Reserved station specification data station number 3 M300 891 4 mov H4 D50 71 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification data M300 wH H2 60 Error invalid station specification station number 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 120 mov K100 D70 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word Mov K100 71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word moy KO 72 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14H for station No 20 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Parameter registration data link startup M300 14834 GP RLPASET uo DO D10 D50 D60 D70 M301 Dedicated instruction RLPASET Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 181 M300 1 Turn the parameter setting instruction off SB3 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction M310 Instruct to start the control program at normal completion M302 Performs abnormal of the RLPASET instruction completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter Ghi US i 5
479. tation count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set E Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 39 11 39 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh
480. tation number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 4 Station number 3 je Remote register RWr Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 iK Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Area of refresh compulsory clear setting target Area refreshed independently of setting The remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting when the PLC CPUS for the master and local stations come to STOP The remote input RX remote register RWw and remote register RWr are refreshed regardless of the setting when the PLC CPUS for the master and local stations come to STOP 4 29 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Specifying compulsory clear disables compulsory output to slave stations at CPU STOP using GX Developer 2 This setting is also valid when the TO instruction is used for RY refresh 2 Setting method Set the Operational setting value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 6 Con
481. tation sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20X1 X2 10 50 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr local station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 1 3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan ti
482. tations x 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 614 613 b12 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 Setting tor tito G4 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 TN modules 48 47 46 45 to 36 85 34 33 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No reserved station specification for all stations x3 Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data 4 Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations Error invalid station specification data Set data Setting range Set by Specify the error invalid station x 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 b13 6012 Setting for 1 to 64 5 modules 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No error invalid station specification for all stations 5 Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data 6 Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations The reserved station specification is given the higher priority if both error invalid station and rese
483. tatus SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the LED display on the corresponding remote device station Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 13 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 x Check the parameters Is the corresponding station set as a reserved m Check the reserved station specified status Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote station SW0074 to SW0077 device station Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SW009C to SW009F Are there any overlap station
484. te I O stations 9 1 Communication buffer 8 20 Communication with the remote I O stations 4 3 Communication with the local stations 4 10 Communication with the remote device stations 4 5 Compatible CC Link ver information 8 38 Compatibility with 1 2 Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 28 Connecting the modules 7 9 Connection cable esses 3 1 CPU monitoring time setting 8 31 Current link scan time 8 34 Cyclic points increase 1 12 4 67 Cyclic A 14 Index 1 D E Data link processing time 5 1 Data link 8 26 Data link restart acceptance 8 27 Data link restart complete 8 27 Data link restart result 8 31 Data link Stop inet 8 26 Data link stop acceptance 8 27 Data link stop complete 8 27 Data link stop 8 32 Data link stop restart
485. te net mode b If it is necessary to change the network parameters while the PLC CPU is running and the data link is being performed the data link should be stopped once using SB0002 data link stop 4 FUNCTION L MELSEC Q c Itis necessary to set I O assignments for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction In addition do not use GX Developer to set the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction If the RLPASET instruction is used to set network parameters for modules whose network parameters and automatic refresh parameters have been set by GX Developer the RLPASET instruction will complete with an error and the network parameter settings performed by the RLPASET instruction become invalid d If the switch setting of an intelligent functional module for which an I O assignment is set has not been performed or is wrong the RLPASET instruction completes with an error However the QJ61BT11N with the smallest head I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically e Donot use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in module setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are s
486. te register R ww W1000 Ver 2 Remote inputfRX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote reaister R Wir Ver 2 Remote reaisterfAww Special relay SB 5 0 5 swo Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z Scan mode setting x b Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station intial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 21 11 21 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Setting range Setting value Input data hold clear Default Clear Occupies 1 to 4 stations Default Occupies 1 station Expanded single double quadruple octuple double cyclic setting Default single Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Occupies 2 stations Master station Master st
487. tected ON Changes detected Indicates whether the Type setting of the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function aaa EREI gt pe fe pe fe fe pe fle pe feds efe ee e pe fe fe Local station Offline 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 5 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description EL mem Onne Offline Master station Local station Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master SBO07B Host master standby station master operation 7 b11 status P OFF Operates as the master station controlling data link ON Operates as the standby master station standby Slave station Indicates the parameter set slave station refresh compulsory clear refresh compulsory SB007C status in case of PLC CPU STOP Clear setting status in 7 b12 9 OFF Refresh case of PLC CPU STOP ON Clears compulsorily Indicates the communication status between remote local intelligent device standby master stations OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station exists information is stored SW0080 to SW0083 Other station Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other stations watchdog timer error OFF No error status ON Error occurrence Ind
488. ted depending on transmission 13 7 Faulty stations cannot be detected 19 7 Forced master switching 8 27 Forced master switching instruction result 8 33 Forced master switching request acknowledgement 8 28 Forced master switching request complete 8 28 1 L information eesssssssss 13 20 Handling precautions 7 3 Hardware test 7 7 Host line status 8 30 Host mater standby master operation SIALUS ie reete a 8 30 Host mode sse 8 28 Host monitoring 13 16 Host station 8 33 Host parameter 8 33 Host standby master station setting status 8 28 Host station operation status 8 29 Host station switch change detection 8 29 A 0 ee 8 28 How to check the function version 2 8 signal list ipine 8 2 Initial setting of the remote device station ssssssssssss 10 7 10 25 10 45 Input data status of host data link faulty STATION c or rei tase E Re eet ros 8 28 Installation nl 7 3 Installation environment 7
489. ter and local stations 4 12 4 12 4 FUNCTION eS MELSEC Q Word data from the master station to all local stations 9 The word data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station The remote register RWw is used as word data for writing in local station systems 10 The data in the buffer memory remote register RWw is stored automatically for each link scan in the buffer memory remote register RWr of all local stations The remote register RWr is used as word data for reading in local station systems 11 The word data stored in the buffer memory remote register RWr is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote register Vaticanis een 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q Word data from a local station to the master and other local stations 12 Word data set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station However the data is stored only in the area corresponding to its own station number 13 The data in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored automatically for each link scan in the remote register RWr of the master station a
490. ter setting i PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment a assignment setting Screen Set the following for the slot in which the master module is mounted The type setting is required set other items as 1 0 Assignment PLC Pens Switch setting Detailed setting Intelli QJ61BT11N 32points needed Type Select intelli Enter the module model name Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the start number for r Base mode Auto C Detail 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default Settings should be set as same when Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data using multiple CPLI the master module b Intelligent function module switch setting Click the Switch Setting button in the I O assignment setting screen to display the screen shown to the left ime Ee Set the input format to hexadecimal and enter S amp T Tue T edis Seach 21 Sich S Sch values for switches 3 4 The switch settings are 0 PLC PLC A 1 00 Intell QJ6IBTTIN 0000 0100 indicated in the following table 2 1 1 d If switches 4 have not been set or the ae settings are not as indicated in the following RES table the RLPASET instruction is
491. the completion device D and the status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RISEND instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program E 4 i Execution completion of ON the RISEND uc MN NN RISEND instruction or IE S oe FF Completion device ON Abnormal Completion Normal Status display OFF i completion y device at completion 1 scan Send completion OFF RYn FF RXn 9 Receive completion d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RISEN
492. the STOP operation when the CPU is stopped See Section 4 4 10 for how to stop the data link DESIGN PRECAUTION N CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the CPU user s manual to use Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e When installing the module securely insert the module fixing tabs into the mounting holes of the base unit while pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of the module downward Improper installation may result in malfunction breakdown or dropping out of the module Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use e Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so m
493. the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 1 3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 X 1 X 1 10 30 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME e MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple e NEC CNN ENT 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 x 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local s
494. the remote device local intelligent x3 4 00 RWr device standby master to Master station stations 5 For receiving Local station For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station 5400 21504 to Use prohibited 1 7FFFu ion O Available Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors x2 Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected x3 Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected Ver 2 compatible remote register 8 PROGRAMMING 8 3 2 Buffer memory details MELSEC Q The following explains the details of items shown in Table 8 2 Buffer Memory List in Section 8 3 1 1 Parameter information area Stores the parameter settings Do not perform write to the parameter information area Doing so may cause an error Table 8 3 Parameter Information Area List 1 3 Item Description Number of connected modules Number of retries Number of automatic return modules Standby master station specification Operation specification when CPU is down Scan mode specification Delay time setting Reserved station specification Error invalid station specification Stores the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that are connected to the master station including reserved
495. the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 Example Remote device station Local station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Address Remote register RWw Address 4 00 4400 Station 4 Wet PW number 1 4 02 RWw 2 4402 number 1 4 RWw3 44031 4 04 RWw 4 44044 4C054 O RWS RWw5 4405 4s 7 7 UBWS i 4406 4C74 Rw RWw7 44071 4 08 RWw 8 44084 e awe SICGHNNNN qc 4409 4COAn RWwA 440An Station 4COBs RWwB 440B Station number 2 4 RWw 440Cn l number 2 4 00 RWwD 4400 4 0 440 4 RWF 440 4 10 RWw 10 44101 4 11 RWwii 4411u 4 12 RWwi2 44129 4013H RWwi3 4419s to 5 RWw 7FC 4 RW7ED RWw7FD 4BFD SaF N Pe bo 4 RWw7FE 4BFEu se 1 4 RWwTFF 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW Th
496. thin the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1500 g Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWr refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 h Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWw refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1500 i Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q j Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 6 Example of Parameter Settin
497. tilation 5 Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube 6 Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module 7 Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal screws using torque within the following ranges 1 Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed 2 Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed 7 2 2 Installation environment For further details see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings The following section describes the parts names of the master and local modules and the contents of the LED display and switch settings QJ61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SM
498. time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20X1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 3 Master station remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX remote
499. tings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Number of ex a CC LinkM station 1 Y r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data p Case of CPU STOP setting 7 2 zi Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name j r E e station 1 n r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked r Parameter name p Number 0 i r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r of CPU STOP setting 9 irj Clears compulsoribi
500. tinuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station meaning a backup station for the master station if a system down occurs in the master station due to a malfunction in the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to normal mode and to system operation as the standby master station even during data link control by the standby master station thus preparing itself for a standby master station system down master station duplex function 4 FUNCTIONS Controlling Controlling the data link of the CC Link system Standby Data link control by the master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 NS MELSEC Q Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC Link system becomes faulty Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 X A
501. tion symbol condition TIEN RIRCV I 4 L 4sRiRcv Un o 62 D2 Command RIRCV GP RIRCV Un 51 D1 S2 D2 Set data Setting range Data type Un fS Start I O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored Device name specified device S2 Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D2 Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the Bit reading D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Setby Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 Access code S1 2 Set 0004 0004H User Attribute code Buffer memory 1 3 Specify the buffer memory start address User address Number of points x2 81 unes Specify the read data count in word units 1 to 480 User App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q
502. tion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIWT instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing processing END processing END processing Sequence program t ON the RIWT instruction Ne RIWT instruction OFF Boles i ON Completion device _ EC 1 i completion M S AES a Status display device 1 Normal completion at completion 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIWT instruction is 8 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation
503. tion number 2 Occupies 2 stations Local station additional mode Station number 4 Occupies 4 stations MELSEC Q Remote device station Ver 2 compatible Station number 8 Occupies 1 station i Remote input RX i r gt Station number 1 Station number 2 i Remote ouIput RY H H Station number 3 i Ver1 Station number 1 5 Output compatible Station number 2 remote number 3 output RY Station number 4 lation number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Remote output RY to double POINT 1 Set the station numbers of the slave stations to be added after the last station number used in the existing system In the above example the slave stations are added to and after station No 4 since the existing system uses up to station No 3 2 When the ver 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted the refresh devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added or deleted slave station Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4 8 3 In the remote net additional mode the ver 2 compatible slave station must be placed in the latter half as described in 1 When there is a possibility that ver 1 compatible slave stations will be added in the f
504. tion processing time ms 20 1 3X 2 15 27 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr remote device station RWr This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the data for the CPU device is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20x1 X1 41 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master stati
505. tion specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the setting for number of points to read n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start I O number 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 300u Automatic update buffer memory 5FFH When is turned ON the following example program reads 10 word data to DO or succeeding addresses from the automatic update buffer offset value of 100 400 of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO XQ SW80 0 0 F e RIFR 4 K1 H100 DO K10 App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 6 RITO instruction The RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Ew user File Direct function register register Instruction Execution symbol condition Command RITO eno Command RITO eRT m 2 m Set data Setting range Data type Un number of the module to FEH Intelligent device station number 1 to 64 Random access buffer specification Binary 16 bits The offset value of the
506. to RX 80 aM RY 8F to RY80 4208 number 2 40091 RX9F to RX 90 EE i RY 9F to RY90 4209 400 RXAF to RX AO ME ME RY AF to RY AO 420A 400B4 RX BF to RX BO MEE RY BF to 420B 400 RXCF to RX CO RY CF to RY CO 420 400D4 RX DF to RX DO ME MEE RY DF to RY DO 42009 400 RXED to RXEO J Rv ED to Rv Eo 420 to to to to 41 to RX1FCO RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43FCu 41FDu RX1FDF to RX1FDO RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FD 41 RX1FEF to RX1FEO RY1FEF to RY1FEO 43FEx 41 RX1FFF to RXTFFO E 1 to RY1FFO 4 8 22 8 22 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 2 to 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 The last two bits cannot be used for co
507. tomatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop g z y Scan mode settin Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information Station inf Remote device station initial Init ntemuptseting Interrupt 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset ES Ready Q02H Host station Ove SCRL 11 34 11 34 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Input data hold clear Clear H Default Clear usi Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations occupied Occupies 4 stations P Default Occupies 1 station stations Expanded single double quadruple octuple ee cyclic setting Default single Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duple
508. tores automatic update data when performing transient transmission communication using the automatic update buffer with the AJ65BT R2 The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT R2 is specified by a network parameter For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Communication example using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 first module CPU Buffer memory 4 1 Automatic RIFR Automatic Automatic update update 2 update buffer De oF buffer for memory the first module 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer for the first module 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the CPU device For details on the automatic update timing see AJ65BT R2 Type RS 232C Interface Module User s Manual 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 10 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station lt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station
509. tores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO005F initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB ae 7 oF instruction result Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 1 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 11 10 11 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference For reference an example setting performed with the sequence below Checking of AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV status Xo XOF Xi 5080 0 o
510. ts OFF All points OFF Continue Not affected by the communication status of the remote device station Continue Not affected by the communication status of the local station 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer the data is cleared when the RY refresh device is set to Y the data is cleared or held when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 2 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station the receive area is retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations 5 44 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 lists the status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 The status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Remote device station Local station standby mast
511. ts power OFF The settings of the station number setting switch and the transmission rate mode setting switch become valid when the module power is turned from OFF to ON or the PLC CPU is reset Thus if the settings were changed while the module power was ON turn the module power from OFF to ON or reset the PLC CPU again 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 4 Checking the Module Status Hardware Test The hardware test checks whether or not each module works properly by itself Always perform this hardware test before configuring the system and for each module by itself without connecting the cable Otherwise the hardware test will not be executed properly Execute the hardware test using the following procedure Start Connect the terminal resistor attached to the module between the DA and DB terminals of the master local module Check items prior to turning the power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to A to E the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Power ON Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to
512. tside of the above setting range is specified Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed with a dedicated instruction SW000A CPU monitoring time Default value 90 seconds 60 setting Setting range 0 to 3600 seconds The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value outside x x x of the above setting range is specified Indi h SWO020 ndicates the module status 620 Module status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with P Data link restart result 580000 641 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 T Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master Refresh instruction at NR SW0043 standby master Switching Sog 0 9 Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 8 31 8 31 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 8 PROGRAMMING SWO0045 6454 SWO0049 6494 SW004B 64 SWO004D 64D SWO04F 64F SW0052 6529 MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 2 8 Availability O Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Description Offline Stores the execution result of the data link stop instruction with SB0002 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates t
513. ttings essneeen 6 15 6 4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 6 17 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings ssssseseeneeeenneneennee nennen 6 17 6 4 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter 5 6 22 6 4 3 Local station network parameter settings ssssssseeneeneneee nennen 6 24 6 4 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 27 6 5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net additional mode 6 29 6 5 1 Master station network parameter settings 6 29 6 5 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter 5 6 34 6 5 3 Local station network parameter settings sssssesseeeenennnne nennen 6 37 6 5 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 40 6 6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote I O net 6 43 6 6 1 Master station network parameter settings ssssssseeneeneneenee nennen 6 43 6 6 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter
514. uest from the line 5 5 b10 amont OFF Not acknowledged 9 ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master 580058 Master switching station to master station is complete 5 5 b11 request complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been Forced master SB005C switching r quest acknowledged 5 b12 d E OFF Not acknowledged 9 ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is Forced master SB005D switching request complete 5Eb b13 e a OFF Not complete P ON Complete 580050 5 5 Execution status of Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure remote device station OFF Not executed SB005E 5 5 014 i initialization procedure ON Being executed Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure Completion status of remote device station SE 913 initialization procedure DEF Not complete ON Complete Indicates the mode setting status of the transmission rate mode 580060 Host mode setting switch for the host 5 6 bO OFF Online ON Other than online Indicates the station type of the host OFF Master station station number 0 ON Local station station numbers 1 to 64 Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for SB0062 Host standby master t
515. uffer Memory Addresses Buffer memory address y Item Default Hex TE ee ee ESSE ES 1118 45 4604 0000 o t 0 4 1246 4 0 1059 1874 561 to H H H 1377 0000s o t oj PR RAMMIN e 2 MELSEC Q Example When the local station where expanded cyclic setting has been made and the remote I O stations where remote I O station points setting has been made are connected Local station Station number 1 Occupies 2 stations Expanded cyclic setting Master station octuple Remote I O station Remote station Station number 3 Station number 4 Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Remote I O station point Remote I O station point setting 8 point setting setting 8 point setting Buffer memory name Description Station No 1 RX offset 4000 Head buffer memory address of RX of station No 1 Station No 1 RX size 24 184 384 number of RX points 16 24 words Station No 2 RX offset 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 2 RX size 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 3 RX offset 4018 Head buffer memory address of RX of station No 3 Station No 3 RX size 1 18 Though lower 8 pits of the buffer memory address 401 8 are the corresponding size of RX of station No 3 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Head buffer memory addres
516. ulty the data link control will automatically be transferred to the standby master station but the refresh instruction of the cyclic data will not be issued Specify the cyclic data refresh using the sequence program Once specified the information prior to the error detection at the master station will be output to each station e When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station the master station s parameters cannot be updated f An error error code B39A occurs at the standby master station if there is a difference between the station number setting of the station number setting switches of the standby master station and the station number setting of the network parameter standby master station number of the master station If an error has occurred change the parameter setting of the master station or the station number setting switch setting of the standby master station and then reset the PLC CPU of the standby master station 9 If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its original position without turning the power off when the master station is controlling the data link both the master and standby master stations operate as master stations An error occurs since the data link control has been transferred to the standby master station ERR LED lights up h When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station
517. umber m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 220X1 43X3 41 5 30 5 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 4 Master station local station Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX local station RY This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON OFF until the master station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan ti
518. umber 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Data B control in progress LA Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Master station returns to normal and comes back online gt Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down Master station Standby master station Station number 0 1 Station number 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Data link control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Problem occurrence in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Data link Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic comsefiinication Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online gt Standby master station Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Station number 1 Master station Nu
519. umber 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Station number 4 8 point output module 18 output module 1324 point output module Odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations cannot be set for 8 remote station points Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station 1 station Occupies 1 station Refer to Section 6 6 2 2 for setting 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting method Using GX Developer make setting by choosing Station information setting Remote station points in the network parameter dialog box For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 1 Precautions for setting the remote I O station points The number of parameter set remote I O station points should be equal to or greater than the number of I O points of the mounted remote I O stations If it is less than the number of I O points of the mounted remote I O stations the inputs outputs after the set number of points will not operate normally 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 14 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode This function increases the number of cyclic points When increasing the nu
520. utomatically performs handshaking with the RIRCV specified station and reads data from the Appendix 2 3 Intelligent buffer memory of that station device station Automatically performs handshaking with the RISEND specified station and writes data into the buffer Appendix 2 4 memory of that station Reads data in the automatic update buffer of RIFR B Appendix 2 5 the specified station Writes data into the automatic update buffer of RITO 2 Appendix 2 6 the specified station Sets the network parameters for the master Master station RLPASET Appendix 2 7 station and starts up the data link Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 1 RIRD instruction The RIRD instruction reads the data for the specified points from the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ra user File Direct function register register Word module d ma Instruction Execution bol diti symbol condition Command RIRD G RIRD Un S D1 D2 Command ABD Set data Setting range Data type ae number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the
521. utput range setting RWw9 i Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CH 1 digital value setting RWw0 500 CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog output enable disable flag RY00 Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RY01 Read CH L check code RWr0 RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 35 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally L RUN RUN Controlling data link MST S MST Sending data ERR LERR s e oe s 4 b LED display of the remote device station For both the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN confirm that the LED display status is as sh
522. uture in the remote net additional mode set multiple reserved stations after the ver 1 compatible slave station to ensure ease of expanding the system 4 For the system that includes a standby master station it is recommended to change for the remote net ver 2 mode When the remote net additional mode is used the sequence program for the standby master station must be corrected Setting method Using GX Developer set the network parameters For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for cyclic points increase setting a Whether system can be configured or not The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not in each station Slave station QU61BT11N QJe1BT11 Remote station Standby Intelligent device Local Remote Local station Standby master station master station Remote device station station tati station station Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 Master station mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible Additional mode O QJ61BT11N Cyclic transmission enabled A Cyclic transmission enabled on condition Cyclic transmission disabled 1 When the master station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode of the QJ61BT11N and the lo
523. ve AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwo0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 34 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change Initial setting change 152 0 1014 H30 1015 SET 11079 x1079 i 179 Y1079 AJeSVBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting 000000 X107B 181 KX MOVP K500 W100 Digital value setting MOVP K1000 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X107B 207 H 11060 Analog output enable 11061 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing X107A 2361 BMOVP D510 K2 MVP w4 D518 Error reset SET YIO7A Y107A X107A 2651 H ME RST Y107A 268 MCR NO 269 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 35 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 o
524. vice comment i Parameter Start 1 0 No amp PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Local station E Remote pass Master station data link type EL Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wr Remote registerF ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register R wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set E Ready Q02H Host station Owwte SCRL 11 23 11 23 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for
525. vice for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below eT ST al sfr ale Ta zi EET al zizi oles 2 2 m TIGE No of boards in module hz Boards Blank no setting 89 8 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 2 3 2 13 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 sf PLC paramete Operational 0 erational settings 2 Network parar Master station v 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode v E II Device init All connect count 2 Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register E wr WO Remote reaister E w w W100 Ver 2 Remote input AX Ver 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote Ver 2 Remote reaisterfE ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special register S w 5 0 Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No D ERR i Delay infomation setti 0 Station information settin Stal Remote device station initial l
526. vice station station number 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV For write 1 eae W100 RWwO A D conversion enable prohibit specification W101 RWw1 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting W102 RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting W103 RWw3 Average processing specification W104 RWw4 CH 1 average time number of times setting W105 RWwS5 2 average time number of times setting W106 RWw6 CH 3 average time number of times setting W107 RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting W108 RWw8 CH 5 average time number of times setting W109 RWw9 CH 6 average time number of times setting W10A CH 7 average time number of times setting W10B RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting For read wo00 Rwro CH 1 digital output value W001 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value W002 RWr2 CH 3 digital output value W003 RWr3 CH 4 digital output value W004 RWr4 CH 5 digital output value W005 RWr5 CH 6 digital output value W006 RWr6 CH 7 digital output value W007 RWr7 8 digital output value WO008 b RWr 8 Error code W009 RWr9 Reserved W00A RWrA Reserved WOOB RwrB Reserved 10 14 10 14 MELSEC Q 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Checking of AJO5VBTCU 68ADV status X0 XOF Xi 9080
527. was not Specify the file register error specified capacity The mode setting of the remote control X cds jode Mor specification ES was incorrect Secure a communication buffer area with a parameter Set the communication buffer Size of the corresponding station within the range Make the communication buffer Size of the corresponding station greater than the transient data length Check the cable and the corresponding station All stations stopped communications All stations error rey Check the cables x during line test 1 The station number setting switch setting Check the station number and the number of occupied stations of the module Reduce the number of master stations on the same line to one Alternatively check the line status There is most likely a hardware error in either the QJ61BT11N the CPU module the base unit or other modules Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Wait for a while before transmitting again transient overload status Check the operation of the CPU monitoring timer time out The CPU monitoring timer timed out P target station 13 15 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer 13 16 Check the status of each module after all the modules have been connected using CC Link dedicated cables and verify that data link can be performed normally It is also possible when the QJ61
528. wn by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station using the sequence program 2 Master station input Standby master station standby Station number 1 Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 MER Number of occupied stations 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 i Remote Remote I Remote Remote I input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote O station RYOO to RYOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station is used as input data by the standby master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 34 4 34 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b When the master station is faulty and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master station output Standby master station controlling Master station Station number 1 0 Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote Remote Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station RX10 to RX1F ER F Station number 3 M aes OU Lm men Nu
529. x function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 pc All Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Ps Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Remote output RY RorZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR PO Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR iM E R or ZR asina usc NN RWr Eee RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR OSES Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR o SES 11 35 11 35 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 __ Automatic reconnection R o station count Default 1 OoOo Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous TT Scan mode setting Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program Device comment i Parameter
530. y a station number that is B302 setting error number during temporary error invalid no greater than the highest x request temporary error invalid cancel communication station number request Specified station number not The station number was not specified during Set a specified station number B303 set error temporary error invalid request temporary SW0003 SW0004 to SW0007 x error invalid cancel request An error was detected in aremote rit entdevicestatonor B304 Line test error station detected Se can Wen NE test standby master station is was performed operational and that the cable is not disconnected A station number other than the head Specify a head station when B306 Specified station number station number was specified during temporary error invalid setting error temporary error invalid request temporary request temporary error invalid error invalid cancel request cancel request is requested All stations were in data link error status when one of the following requests was B307 stations data link error made eee e SB0000 data link restart e SB0002 data link stop B308 Station number setting error The station number of the slave station is ESOT aa installation status outside of the range between 1 and 64 between 1 and 64 9 The station number of the connected module was duplicated including B309 Station number overlap error number of occupied stations eee However this ex
531. y master station only SBO00C Forced master 5E0u b12 switching 2 80020 5E2 00 580040 Data link restart 5 4 b0 acceptance 580044 Data link stop 5 4 b4 acceptance N Temporary error invalid acceptance status SB0048 4 b8 SB0049 4 b9 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status SB004B 4 b11 SB004C Line test acceptance 4 b12 status 8 27 8 27 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 3 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description reci Master station Local station he lin ompletion status 580040 Line test complete testcompieti 1 BE4 b13 status OFF Not executed ON Test complete 7 Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment Parameter information SEE read acknowledgment status x x 4 b14 Nes 9 OFF Not executed 8 ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read Parameter information SPOF read completion request BE4 b15 OFF Not executed status ON Test complete Indicates the offline test execution status Offline test status OFF Not executed ON In progress E Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station Master switching ojo SB005A feauest when it has received a master switching req
532. y with the conventional module QJ61BT11 is achieved Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product Remote net ver 2 mode Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points Ver 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 2 mode Generic Term Abbreviation Description Link special relay for CC Link Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SB for convenience Link special register for CC Link 16 bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SW for convenience Remote input for CC Link Information entered in bit units from the remote station to the master station Expressed as RX for convenience Remote output for CC Link Information output in bit units from the master station to the remote station Expressed as RY for convenience Remote register Write area for CC Link Information output
533. yclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n x 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 2 10 50 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Master station RY local station RX This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON OFF until the local station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for
534. zI A of Sl m x ES Unset project No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program Device comment et i 2 3 E amp Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 8 PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 27 Network Local station 3 Remote pass Master station data link type i 18 Device memory Mode Remote net Addtional mode 18 Device init All connect count Remote input FiX Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEix 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote register w Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special registei SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset Ready 00219 Host station Ove 2 Setthe network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in Boards for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Setthe station type using Type
535. zal Bale a m x No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 1 2 3 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings T Local station T Master station data link type Z E Mode Remote nel Ver 2 mode T 4 KIKI X10001 Y10001 wo W100 SB 5 0 4 2 indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setiftisneeded Nosetting Alteadyset z Project i Ready 0 Host station I wwe 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents